Korg Musical Instrument microX User Manual

Operation Guide  
E
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing the Korg microX Synthesizer/ Controller. To help you get the most out of  
your new instrument, please read this manual carefully.  
About this manual  
The owners manuals and how to use  
them  
The microX come with the following owners  
manuals.  
Conventions in this manual  
Abbreviations for the manuals OG, PG  
In the documentation, references to the manuals  
are abbreviated as follows.  
Operation Guide  
OG: Operation Guide  
PG: Parameter Guide  
Parameter Guide (included in the CD-ROM)  
Operation Guide  
Procedure steps 1. 2. 3. …  
Please read this first. It explains the names and  
functions of each part of the microX, how to make  
connections, basic operation, an overview of each  
mode, and how to edit sounds. This guide also  
explains the arpeggiator function, effects, and  
drum kits.  
This indicates the steps of a procedure.  
Symbols  
,
, Note  
These symbols respectively indicate a caution, a  
MIDI-related explanation, a supplementary note.  
The Operation Guide also contains troubleshoot-  
ing information, and supplemental information  
such as specifications.  
Example screen displays  
The values of the parameters shown in the exam-  
ple screens of this manual are only for explana-  
tory purposes, and may not necessary match the  
values that appear in the LCD display of your  
instrument.  
Parameter Guide  
The Parameter Guide contains explanations and  
other information regarding the operations of the  
parameters and settings on the microX.  
The explanations are organized by mode, and  
page. Explanations and other information on the  
effects and their parameters are also provided for  
teach effect.  
MIDI-related explanations  
CC# is an abbreviation for Control Change Num-  
ber.  
In explanations of MIDI messages, numbers in  
square brackets [ ] always indicate hexadecimal  
numbers.  
Refer to this guide when an unfamiliar parame-  
ter appears in the display, or when you need to  
know more about a particular function.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table of Contents  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2], [3], [4],  
[SELECT] .............................................................43  
Changing the programs within the  
Combination .......................................................60  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2], [3], [4],  
[SELECT] .............................................................61  
Connecting a damper pedal, foot switch,  
or foot pedal........................................................26  
Altering Programs to fit within a  
Combination .......................................................66  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning a program to a track, and setting  
Copying the settings of a combination to a  
Restoring the factory settings (Loading the  
Assigning functions to REALTIME  
Bypassing the insert effect or the master  
Setting category names  
Operating requirements for connection to a  
Drum kit 4: DKit,  
Control 6: Ext.Control settings.......................90  
Arpeggiator features in  
The arpeggiator in Combination and Multi  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Start  
This Quick Start is provided for those who just want to get started trying out the sounds right  
away.  
It explains how to set up the microX, how to select programs and control the sound, and how to  
listen to the demo songs.  
After youve finished reading this Quick Start section, please also take a look at the full explana-  
tions that follow.  
Setup  
Make all your connections with the power off (on all units!). If you don’t, you may damage  
your speaker system or damage your microX and/ or other equipment. Please use caution.  
1. Connect the included AC adapter.  
Use only the AC adapter included with  
the microX. Do not use any other AC  
adapter.  
Connecting the AC adapter  
4 Cable hook  
Power switch  
2. Connect the microX to your audio  
monitoring system.  
1 Power connector  
Using standard audio cables with 1/ 4"  
phone plugs, connect the microX’ (MAIN  
OUTPUT) L/ MONO and R output jacks  
to the input jacks of your mixer,  
amplified monitor speakers, or audio  
recording device.  
Be careful not to  
bend this portion  
excessivelywhen you  
wrap the cable  
through the cable  
hook.  
AC adapter  
2
Plug into an AC  
outlet  
If youre listening through headphones,  
connect them to the headphone jack  
located on the left front of the microX.  
The headphones produce the same signal  
3 Power cable  
as the (MAIN OUTPUT) L/ MONO and R jacks.  
Audio output device  
connections  
Powered  
monitors  
INPUT  
INPUT  
Power switch  
L/MONO  
R
Adjust the  
[VOLUME] slider  
Headphones  
PHONES  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Quick Start  
3. Turn the microX’s [VOLUME] knob down (to the left).  
Turn on your audio monitor system and set the volume to a normal level.  
4. Turn on the microX by pressing the power switch located on the rear panel.  
5. Slowly raise the microX’s [VOLUME] knob to an appropriate volume.  
Playing programs and combinations  
By default, Combination mode will be selected when you turn on the power.  
Play the keyboard, and you will hear the sound of bank A combination number 000.  
A combination consists of up to eight programs that are split, zoned, layered or velocity-  
switched across the keyboard. A combination can also use up to two Arpeggiators simulta-  
neously (a program can use only one Arpeggiator), letting you produce far more complex  
sounds than a single program.  
Although you could simply continue selecting and playing different combinations, lets start by  
selecting and listening to the “basic” sounds of the microX – programs.  
Note: If you dont hear any sound when you play the keyboard: Check the connections once  
again. Also make sure that the microX’s VOLUME and the volume of your powered speakers or  
stereo amp are turned up appropriately.  
Selecting programs by bank and number  
1, 4  
5
2
3
1. Press one of the PROGRAM [A]–[GM] buttons. (The button will light.)  
You will enter Program mode, and the bank you specified will be selected. Notice that the  
upper line of the display indicates “PROG 0: Play” (mode name, page number and name).  
Mode name  
Page number and name  
Parameter name  
Tempo  
Category number  
and name  
Tab name  
Bank  
number  
Program  
Select  
(program  
number  
and name)  
Tab  
Knob B assign list  
2. Make sure that “Program Select” (program number and name) is selected.  
If this is not selected, use the ClickPoint [π][] to highlight the “Program Select” indication.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playing programs and combinations  
3. Turn the [VALUE] dial to select the program you want to play.  
You can also press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight the field, then use [π][] to select  
a program, and press the center to finalize your selection.  
4. Press one of the PROGRAM [A]–[GM] button to switch banks.  
When you select a different Bank, that buttons LED will light, and the selected bank will  
appear in the left side of the display.  
For example, to select bank B, press the PROGRAM [B] button. The [B] button will light, and  
the name Bank B will appear in the left of the display. The [GM] button operates differently  
from the other bank buttons. Each time you press this button, the bank will switch in the  
order of G g(d) G g(d) ... etc.  
The programs are organized into banks of 128 (except for g(d)). Select the desired bank, and  
then select a program number within that bank.  
5. Play the keyboard to hear the program you selected.  
While playing the keyboard, use the joystick, and realtime controllers to modify the sound.  
The result will differ depending on the program, so play the keyboard while operating these  
controllers to hear what they do. You can use the OCTAVE [][π] buttons to change the  
pitch in steps of one octave.  
You can also press the [AUDITION] button (it will light) and a riff (phrase) suitable for that  
program will play automatically.  
Using the [CATEGORY] and PROGRAM/COMBINATION buttons to select a cat-  
egory  
The microX lets you choose programs from categories such as “synthesizer,” “bass,” or  
“drums.”  
1
2
3
3
4
1. Press the [CATEGORY] button.  
The category menu will appear.  
Category No.  
Sel (Select)  
Category  
Program  
2. Press the PROGRAM or COMBINATION button for the desired category. The category you  
specify will be selected. (A category name is printed below each bank button.)  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Quick Start  
For example if you press the [CATEGORY] button and then press the PROGRAM [E] button,  
youll be able to choose only from programs in the Keyboard category. The Keyboard  
category contains programs such as acoustic piano, and electric piano etc.  
You can also use the [PAGE+][PAGE–] buttons to step through the categories one by one.  
3. By using the [VALUE] dial or the ClickPoint [π][] to select programs, you can step through  
the programs in the same category.  
4. Press the [MENU/ OK] button to confirm your selection. If you decide not to select a  
program, press the [EXIT/ CANCEL] button.  
Selecting combinations by bank and number  
1, 4  
5
2
3
1. Press a COMBINATION [A]–[C] button. (The button will light.)  
You will enter Combination mode, and the bank you specified will be selected. Notice that  
the upper line of the display indicates “COMBI 0: Play” (mode name, page number and  
name).  
Mode name  
Page number and name  
Category number  
and name  
Parameter name  
Tempo  
Tab name  
Bank  
number  
Combi Select  
(combination  
number and  
name)  
Tab  
Control assign list  
2. Make sure that “Combi Select” (combination number and name) is selected.  
If this is not selected, use the ClickPoint [π][] to highlight the “Combi Select” indication.  
3. Turn the [VALUE] dial to select the combination you want to play.  
4. Press a COMBINATION [A]–[C] button to switch banks.  
When you select a different Bank, the buttons LED will light, and the selected bank will  
appear on the left side of the display.  
For example, to select bank B, press the COMBINATION [B] button. The [B] button will light,  
and the name Bank B will appear in the left of the display.  
Combinations are organized into banks of 128. Select the desired bank, and then select a  
combination number within that bank.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing programs and combinations  
5. Play the keyboard to hear the combination you selected.  
While playing the keyboard, use the joystick, and realtime controllers to modify the sound.  
The result will differ depending on the combination, so play the keyboard while operating  
these controllers to hear what they do. You can use the OCTAVE [][π] buttons to change  
the pitch in steps of one octave.  
Note: You cant use the [AUDITION] button to play a riff (phrase) in Combination mode.  
Selecting combinations by category  
In Combination mode you can select combinations by category just as in Program mode. For the  
Using controllers to modify the sound  
You can operate the microX’s joystick, OCTAVE [][π], and realtime controllers to add expres-  
sive variation to your performances.  
Joystick  
You can use the joystick to vary the pitch or adjust the depth of modulation. The actual result  
will depend on the program and combination, but these controllers are normally used to apply  
the following effects.  
+Y  
Deepen the vibrato  
–X  
Lower the  
pitch  
+X  
Raise the  
pitch  
–Y  
Deepen the wah effect  
OCTAVE  
You can use the OCTAVE [][π] buttons to shift the pitches assigned to the keyboard in one-  
octave steps over a range of 3 octaves.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Quick Start  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2], [3], [4], [SELECT]  
Use the [SELECT] button to select realtime controller mode A/ B/ C, and use knobs [1]–[4] to  
control the tone, effects, MIDI control changes, and arpeggiator etc. while you perform. Use  
these knobs when you want to modify the sound while performing, or to make simple edits.  
[SELECT] button  
Knobs [1]–[4]  
Here well explain how to use the realtime controllers in Program mode.  
Note: We wont be using the External Control function, so make sure that the [EXT.  
CONTROLLER] button is dark. If it is lit, press the [EXT. CONTROLLER] button once.  
1. Press one of the PROGRAM [A]–[GM] buttons. (The button will light.)  
2. Choose “Program Select” (program number and name), and turn the [VALUE] dial to select  
the program that you want to control using the realtime controllers.  
3. Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT] button to light the “A” LED located at the right  
of the button.  
4. Turn knob [1] (LPF CUTOFF) to adjust the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter.  
When you adjust the cutoff frequency of the filter, the brightness of the sound will change.  
The effect will depend on the settings of the program parameters, but normally, rotating the  
knob toward the left will darken the sound, and rotating it toward the right will brighten it.  
5. Turn knob [2] (RESONANCE/ HPF) to adjust the resonance level of a low pass filter or the  
cutoff frequency of a high pass filter. The content that is controlled will depend on the filter  
type specified by the program. By adjusting the filter resonance level, you can increase or  
decrease the resonance level to add a unique character to the sound.  
Adjusting the cutoff frequency of the high-pass filter will modify the thickness of the sound  
from which the low frequency range has been filtered out.  
6. Turn knob [3] (EG-INTENSITY) to adjust filter EG intensity (the depth at which the filter EG  
is applied).  
Rotating the knob will affect the depth of the filter EG. Normally, rotating the knob toward  
the left will make the filter EG apply less deeply, and rotating it toward the right will make  
the filter EG apply more deeply. Since the filter EG will operate based on the cutoff frequency  
of the filter, knobs [1] and [3] will work together to control the tonal changes produced by the  
filter.  
7. Turn knob [4] (EG-RELEASE) to adjust EG release times of the filter and amp. This will  
determine the time from note-off until the sound disappears.  
When you adjust the knob, the release times of the filter EG and the amp EG will change.  
Normally, rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the release time, and rotating it  
toward the right will lengthen the release time.  
8. Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT] button to light the “B” LED located at the right  
of the button.  
In B-mode, effective functions for each of the preloaded programs and combinations are  
assigned to the knobs. This lets you use the knobs to control volume, portamento time, pan,  
filter and amp EG, pitch LFO, master effect send levels, and other parameters.  
Turn each knob to hear the result.  
Note: The B-mode functions for the REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2], [3], and [4] knobs can be  
viewed for Program mode in the 0: Play, Program page, and for Combination mode in the 0:  
Play, Combination page.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing programs and combinations  
Using the arpeggiator  
As you selected and listened to various programs and combinations, you probably noticed that  
some of them began playing automatically. This is because of the arpeggiator.  
The arpeggiator is a function that automatically generates arpeggios (the notes of a chord  
played individually in a rhythmic pattern). Most arpeggiators produce an arpeggio when you  
play a chord on the keyboard. In addition to this, the microX’s arpeggiator is a polyphonic  
arpeggiator that is able to produce a variety of chordal transformations or phrases based on the  
pitch or timing of the notes you play on the keyboard. These functions let you use the arpeggia-  
tor to play a wide range of patterns including drum or bass phrases, and guitar or keyboard  
backing riffs. It is also effective to use the arpeggiator as part of the sound-creating process  
when creating subtly-moving pads, synth-sounds, or sound effects.  
In Program mode you can use one arpeggiator.  
In Combination mode and Multi mode you can use two arpeggio patterns simultaneously (dual  
polyphonic arpeggiator). This gives you a variety of possibilities, such as applying separate  
arpeggio patterns to a drum program and a bass program, or using splits or velocity to switch  
between arpeggio patterns.  
Here well explain how to use the arpeggiator in Program mode.  
Using the realtime controllers to control the arpeggiator  
1. Press one of the PROGRAM [A]–[GM] button. (The button will light.)  
2. Choose “Program Select” (program number and name), and turn the [VALUE] dial. You will  
notice that the [ARP ON/ OFF] button is lit for some programs. Select one of these programs,  
and play the keyboard; the arpeggiator will start playing.  
Even for other programs, you can press the [ARP ON/ OFF] button (the button will light) to  
turn on the arpeggiator. Play the keyboard to make the arpeggio start.  
3. Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT] button to light the “C” LED located at the right  
of the button.  
4. Turn the [4] (TEMPO) knob to change the tempo.  
5. Turn the [1] (ARP-GATE) knob to change the duration of the arpeggiated notes.  
Note: When knobs [1]–[3] are at their center position (12 oclock), the parameters they control  
will have the values specified within the program.  
6. Turn the [2] (ARP-VELOCITY) knob to change the level of the arpeggiated notes.  
7. Turn the [3] (ARP-LENGTH) knob to change the length of the arpeggio pattern.  
Changing the length of the arpeggio pattern will change the character of the pattern. This  
doesnt work for the preset patterns (UP, DOWN, ALT1, ALT2, and RANDOM).  
Changing the arpeggio pattern  
The microX contains preset arpeggio patterns Preset-0 through Preset-4, and user arpeggio pat-  
terns U000–250.  
1. Press the [PAGE+] button to access the PROG 0: Play, Arp. Play page.  
2. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to choose “Pattern,” and use the [VALUE] dial to select an  
arpeggio pattern.  
3. Play the keyboard and try out various arpeggio patterns.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Start  
Listening to the demo songs  
The microX contains demonstration songs.  
Take a moment to listen to these demo songs to experience the diverse sounds and rich expres-  
sive potential of the microX.  
1
2, 3  
4.1  
4.2  
5
1. Hold down the [CATEGORY] button and press the [AUDITION] button.  
The Demo Song Player page will appear.  
2. Press the [AUDITION] button to begin playback.  
3. Press the [AUDITION] button once again to stop playback.  
4. To select a song for playback, use the ClickPoint [π][] to select the song name (“Demo  
Song Select”) and use the [VALUE] dial to change songs.  
5. To exit the Demo Song Player page, press the [EXIT/ CANCEL] button.  
You can also exit by pressing one of the PROGRAM [A]–[GM], COMBINATION [A]–[C],  
[GLOBAL], or [MULTI] buttons.  
Changing the play mode  
You can play back the demo songs in succession or only one song at a time; use the Click-  
Point [][®][π][] to select “Play Mode” and use the [VALUE] dial etc. to change the set-  
ting.  
Continue to next song: When the currently selected demo song finishes playing, the next  
demo song will play automatically.  
Stop at end of selected song: When the currently selected demo song finishes playing,  
playback will stop.  
If you want all of the demo songs to continue playing repeatedly, use the ClickPoint  
[][®][π][] to select the “Repeat All” check box and then press the ClickPoint center to  
add a check mark.  
Note: This is available only if “Play Mode” is set to Continue to next song.  
This Quick Start section is just an introduction to introduce you to your new synthesizer. Please  
take the time to read the more in-depth sections of this manual that follow.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Introduction  
Main features  
LFO and delay time parameters can be syn-  
High-quality sound featuring the HI  
synthesis system  
The microX Music Synthesizer features Korgs  
acclaimed HI (Hyper Integrated) synthesis sys-  
tem.  
chronized to MIDI clock/ tempo. You can syn-  
chronize sounds or effects to the tempo of the  
sequencer or the arpeggiator.  
A great selection of 640 programs  
In the Program mode, the microX provides 640  
user programs, plus 128 programs + 9 drum sets  
for GM compatibility.  
When shipped from the factory, it is loaded with  
high-quality programs that cover a wide range of  
musical needs.  
The HI (Hyper Integrated) synthesis system is a  
PCM tone generator system with extensive modu-  
lation and effect routing capabilities, as well as full  
digital signal processing that guarantees a rich,  
pristine sound.  
Tone generator section:  
64 MB of preset PCM ROM containing 642 mul-  
tisamples and 929 drumsamples.  
Programs using multisamples that pro-  
vide a broad range of sounds  
The sampling frequency is 48 kHz, and the  
maximum polyphony is 62 voices.  
Based on 642 different multisamples that deliver a  
broad range of sounds ranging from acoustic  
instruments such as piano, guitar, and trumpet, to  
synthesizer sounds or sound effects (oscillator),  
the preset programs provide a rich variety of edit-  
able parameters (filter and amp), effects, and  
arpeggiators.  
Filter/synthesis section:  
24 dB/ oct Low Pass Resonance type or 12 dB/  
oct Low Pass & High Pass type filters can be  
used. A wide variety of filter effects can be  
achieved, from active sounds with aggressive  
resonance to subtle tones using a high pass fil-  
ter.  
Drum programs that support any style  
of rhythm part  
A broad range of editing parameters gives you  
control over every aspect of the sound.  
Based on 40 user drum kits and nine GM2-com-  
patible ROM drum kits, and taking full advantage  
of numerous editable parameters, effects, and  
arpeggiators, the microX provides a great selection  
of preset programs for any style of music.  
Effect section:  
One insert effect (stereo-in/ stereo-out), two  
master effects (mono-in/ stereo-out), and a  
three-band master EQ (stereo-in/ stereo-out)  
can all be used simultaneously. You can select  
from 89 types of effect algorithms, and edit  
them.  
The drum kits that are the basis of each drum pro-  
gram allow you to freely map any of the 929 drum  
or percussion sounds to each note of the keyboard.  
You can also create your own drum kits, and even  
specify filter and amp settings, effect settings, and  
individual audio output routings for each separate  
key.  
Highly flexible effect routing is possible. Effects  
can also be routed freely to the individual out-  
puts.  
Alternate Modulation and Effect Dynamic  
Modulation:  
384 different combinations let you  
freely combine programs  
The microX provides 384 user combinations. The  
factory settings contain a wide variety of Pre-  
loaded combinations.  
The synthesis section (filter etc.) provides Alter-  
nate Modulation functionality, and the effect  
section provides Effect Dynamic Modulation  
functionality. This allows you to freely apply  
modulation to parameters that affect the pitch,  
filter, amp, EG, LFO, effects etc.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Introduction  
A combination allows you to use layers, splits, or  
velocity switching etc. to combine up to eight pro-  
grams together with the effects and the two arpeg-  
giators, in order to create complex sounds that  
could not be produced by a program. You can also  
create combis that include external tone genera-  
tors.  
is also effective for use with subtly moving pads,  
synth sounds, or sound effects.  
In Combination mode, and Multi mode, the  
microX provides dual polyphonic arpeggiators  
that can simultaneously play two arpeggio pat-  
terns. You can apply separate arpeggio patterns to  
drum and bass programs, or use keyboard splits  
or velocity to switch between arpeggio patterns  
for an even more dynamic performance.  
Effects that can creatively manipu-  
late the sound or generate subtle  
ambience  
External control setups  
You can assign twelve MIDI control changes to the  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1]–[4] knobs. The  
microX can hold 64 such sets of twelve control  
change assignments. You can use this capability to  
control a wide range of parameters in realtime,  
such as on the KORG Legacy Collection or other  
soft synthesizers, or the level and pan of your  
DAW (Digital Audio Workstation).  
The microX’s effects can be used in many ways,  
ranging from manipulating the sound dramati-  
cally to creating spacious reverberation. (p.9  
4 channel audio outputs  
In addition to the (MAIN OUTPUT) L/ MONO  
and R main stereo audio outputs, microX provides  
two individual audio outputs, for a total of four  
channels of audio output. The sound from each  
oscillator, drum, timbre/ track, or insert effect can  
be routed freely to any output.  
Direct USB connection to your com-  
puter  
The microX provides a convenient USB connector  
that allows single-cable connection to your com-  
puter, without requiring a MIDI interface or MIDI  
connectors. The microX supports Windows XP  
and Macintosh OS X 10.3 or later.  
Multi mode plays multiple tracks of  
data from an external sequencer  
In Multi mode, the microX can operate as a 16-  
track MIDI multi-timbral sound module, receiving  
multiple tracks of performance data from an exter-  
nal sequencer or similar device. Since you can use  
the effects and the two arpeggiators as well, the  
microX will also function as a more advanced  
sound module.  
microX Plug-In Editor supports edit-  
ing from within your DAW software  
The “microX Editor” is a stand-alone program that  
lets you edit the microX from your Macintosh or  
Windows computer.  
On the other hand, the “microX Plug-In Editor”  
lets you edit the microX as a plug-in instrument  
from within a host application such as DAW (Dig-  
ital Audio Workstation) software. It supports VST,  
Audio Units, and RTAS formats. Both editors are  
included with your microX.  
You can create, save and recall numerous Multi  
sets in the microX and it also supports GM (Gen-  
eral MIDI System Level 1), making it easy to use as  
a sound module for a desktop music system.  
Dual polyphonic arpeggiator  
Five preset arpeggio patterns (UP, DOWN, ALT1  
ALT2, RANDOM) and 251 user arpeggio patterns  
are provided. With the factory settings, these con-  
tain a wide variety of preload arpeggio patterns.  
In addition to providing conventional arpeggiator  
functions, the polyphonic arpeggiator of the  
microX can respond to the pitches or timing of  
your keyboard playing, and produce a diverse  
range of chords or phrases. This can be used to  
play a variety of drum phrases, bass phrases, or  
guitar and keyboard backing riffs. The arpeggiator  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front and rear panel  
Front and rear panel  
Front panel  
14  
6
1
5
10  
12  
9
11  
13  
7
8
3
4
2
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction  
1. [VOLUME] knob  
5. MODE/BANK Select  
Use these buttons to select banks and enter modes.  
The microX has four modes. (p.19)  
This adjusts the volume of the (MAIN OUTPUT)  
L/ MONO, R jacks, as well as the volume of the  
headphone jack.  
PROGRAM [A], [B], [C], [D], [E], [GM] but-  
ton  
COMBINATION [A], [B], [C] button  
[GLOBAL] button  
2. REALTIME CONTROLS  
[SELECT] button  
[1]–[4] knob  
[MULTI] button  
Use the [SELECT] button to choose one of the real-  
time controller modes - A/ B/ C - and use knobs  
[1]–[4] to control the tone, effects, MIDI control  
changes, and arpeggiator etc. while you perform.  
6. Display  
You can select a page, tab, or parameter in the dis-  
play, and specify its value. (p.15)  
When you turn the [EXT. CONTROLLER] button  
on (lit), External Control will be on, and the REAL-  
TIME CONTROLS [1]–[4] knobs will transmit  
MIDI messages to external MIDI devices. (p.111)  
7. CATEGORY  
You can select programs, multisamples, combina-  
tions, timbre/ track programs, effects, or drum  
samples by category.  
[CATEGORY] button  
3. Arpeggiator  
Press this button to access the category menu, and  
choose a program etc. from the list. The category  
menu will appear if you have selected an appro-  
priate mode, page, or parameter. (p.38, 45, 82,  
The microX’s arpeggiator is a polyphonic arpeg-  
giator.  
[ARP ON/OFF] button  
This button turns the arpeggiator on/ off. When  
on, the button will light. (p.91)  
8. AUDITION, Demo Song Player  
[AUDITION] button  
In Program mode when you press the [AUDI-  
TION] button (the button will light), a riff (phrase)  
appropriate for the preloaded or preset program  
will play. (This is called the Audition function.) To  
stop auditioning, press the [AUDITION] button  
once again.  
The LED located above the [ARP ON/ OFF] button  
blinks at quarter-note intervals of the tempo.  
In REALTIME CONTROLS C-mode, you can use  
the [1], [2], [3], and [4] knobs to vary the arpeggio  
pattern in realtime.  
4. External  
You can use the REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2],  
[3], and [4] knobs to transmit MIDI messages.  
Demo song player  
[EXT. CONTROLLER] button  
This switches the external function on/ off. When  
on, the button will light. (p.111)  
When you hold down the [CATEGORY] button  
and press the [AUDITION] button, the Demo  
Song Player page will appear.  
When this is on, you can use the [SELECT] button  
to select the MIDI messages assigned to the knobs,  
and operate the REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2],  
[3], and [4] knobs to transmit these MIDI messages  
to an external MIDI device.  
Select a song and press the [AUDITION] button to  
begin playback. Press the [AUDITION] button  
once again to stop playback.  
To exit from this mode, press the [EXIT/ CANCEL]  
button. (p.8)  
9.VALUE controller  
The [VALUE] dial is used to set the value of the  
selected parameter. (p.20)  
[VALUE] dial  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front panel  
[EXIT/CANCEL] button  
10. PAGE, CURSOR  
When you are in a page other than 0 of each mode,  
you can press this button to move to page 0 of that  
mode.  
[PAGE+][PAGE–] buttons  
You can use these buttons to move forward or  
backward through the different tabs in a page.  
If you press the [EXIT/ CANCEL] button while  
pressing the ClickPoint center, the selected value  
will be reset to 0 or the minimum value.  
By holding down the [MENU/ OK] button and  
pressing these same buttons you can move for-  
ward or backward through the pages themselves,  
such as page 0, 1, 2, etc. (p.20)  
When a dialog box is open, this button will cancel  
the settings made in the dialog box and close the  
dialog box (corresponds to the “Cancel”). If a Util-  
ity menu or page menu is open, pressing [EXIT/  
CANCEL] button will close the menu.  
While the category menu is displayed, you can use  
these buttons to step through the categories one  
by one. (p.38)  
ClickPoint  
The ClickPoint is a multi-function controller.  
11. UTILITY, COMPARE  
[UTILITY] button  
You can move the ClickPoint in the  
([][®][π][]) direction to select parameters. In  
addition, you can press directly down on the cen-  
ter of the ClickPoint (in toward the body of the  
instrument) to select an item in the display.  
After selecting a parameter expressed as a numeri-  
cal value etc., press the center of the ClickPoint;  
the value will be highlighted, and now you can  
use [π][] to increase or decrease the value. To  
finalize the value, press the center once again.  
Press this button when you want to use the utility  
functions. (p.21)  
[COMPARE] button  
Use this button when you wish to compare the  
sound of the program, combination or multi set  
that you are currently editing with the un-edited  
sound that was written into memory. (p.20)  
If you press the [EXIT/ CANCEL] button while  
pressing the ClickPoint center, the selected value  
will be reset to 0 or the minimum value.  
12. JOYSTICK  
This controls pitch or modulation, etc.  
Move the joystick up/ down or left/ right (+Y, Y,  
You can also press the ClickPoint center to access a  
dialog box, to set the numerical value of an edit-  
able condition, or to turn a switch on/ off. If you  
press the ClickPoint on the utility menu, page  
menu, or a text edit button (p.15), the selected  
command or page will appear. Pressing the Click-  
Point center on a check box will switch the item  
on/ off. Pressing the ClickPoint center on a button  
such as OK or CANCEL will confirm the corre-  
sponding choice.  
–X, +X) to control (p.40).  
Various program parameters and effect parame-  
ters will determine what is controlled by the joy-  
stick.  
13. OCTAVE  
OCTAVE [][π] buttons  
These buttons change the pitch range assigned to  
the keyboard over a ±3 octave range in one-octave  
steps. (p.41)  
[MENU/OK] button  
Press this button to access the page menu. (p.19)  
By holding down the [MENU/ OK] button and  
pressing the [PAGE+] button or [PAGE–] button,  
you can move forward or backward in steps of one  
page.  
14. Headphone jack  
This 1/ 8" mini-stereo phone jack carries the same  
signal as the (MAIN OUTPUT) L/ MONO, R jacks.  
The headphone volume is controlled by the [VOL-  
UME] knob.  
If a dialog box is open, this button will confirm the  
settings in the dialog box and close it. (This is the  
same function as the OK button.)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Rear panel  
5
4
3
2
1
What is USB?  
1. AUDIO OUTPUT  
Connect these outputs to the input jacks of your  
amp or mixer. In addition to the (MAIN OUTPUT)  
L/ MONO and R main stereo audio outputs, the  
microX provides two individual audio outputs.  
USB stands for Universal Serial Bus, and is an  
interface for transferring data between a com-  
puter, a keyboard and/ or peripheral devices.  
Note: The USB connector of the microX is only able  
to transmit and receive MIDI data.  
MAIN OUTPUT L/MONO, R jack  
INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1, 2 jack  
5. Power supply  
and follow the correct procedure described there.  
2. PEDALS  
You can connect a damper pedal, foot switch, and  
foot pedal to these jacks. This gives you a broader  
range of functions and effects to control. (p.26)  
Power switch  
This switch turns the power on/ off.  
AC adapter connector  
Connect this to the included AC adapter.  
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack  
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack  
DAMPER jack  
Connections must be made with the power  
turned off. Please be aware that careless  
operation may damage your speaker system  
or cause malfunctions.  
3. MIDI  
MIDI lets you connect microX to computers or  
other MIDI devices, for sending and receiving  
notes, controller gestures, sound settings, and so  
Cable hook  
Use this to secure the cable of the included AC  
adapter. After connecting the AC adapter, fasten  
the cable around the hook located on the microX’s  
rear panel so that the cable will not be pulled out  
inadvertently. Leave enough slack on the plug end  
so that you can disconnect it if you want to.  
MIDI IN connector  
MIDI OUT connector  
Be careful not to bend the base of the plug any  
more than necessary.  
4. USB  
USB connector  
(for connecting to computer)  
You can connect your computer to this connector.  
Using a single USB cable, your microX can send  
and receive MIDI information directly to and from  
a computer, without requiring a MIDI interface.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Objects in the Display and their functions  
* Utility menu  
Objects in the Display and  
their functions  
When you press the [UTILITY] button in a page,  
the utility menu will appear. The utility menu con-  
tains commands that can be used in that page. The  
utility menu that appears will differ depending on  
the page that is selected.  
For details on selecting and executing a utility  
a: Current page  
This indicates the current page within the selected  
mode.  
* Dialog boxes  
When you select a utility menu command etc., a  
dialog box will open.  
From the left, this area shows the mode name,  
page number: name, tab name, and the parameter  
name of the edit cell.  
Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select param-  
eters. To enter a parameter value, use the [VALUE]  
dial, the ClickPoint [π][].To execute the utility  
command, press the [MENU/ OK] button.  
If you decide not to execute, press the [EXIT/  
CANCEL] button. The [EXIT/ CANCEL] button is  
equivalent to “Cancel,” “Done,” or “Exit.”  
Page number:name  
Mode name  
Parameter name  
Tab name  
b: Tab  
Most pages are divided into two or more tabs.  
Use the [PAGE+][PAGE–] buttons to select a tab  
and view that page.  
* Text dialog box  
Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select a text  
button such as , and press the center to open the  
text dialog box.  
c: Parameters  
The parameters for various settings are displayed  
in the display. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][]  
to select the desired parameter.  
In this dialog box you can rename text (e.g., the  
name of a program, combination, or multi set).  
d: Edit cell  
When you use the ClickPoint [][®][π][], the  
selected parameter will be highlighted in the dis-  
play. This area is called the edit cell, and your  
editing will affect the highlighted area. For details  
on how to edit the value, see “3. Selecting a  
* Function buttons  
e: Check box  
Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select one of  
these buttons and press the center to execute the  
following functions.  
Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select a  
check box, and use the [VALUE] dial, the center of  
the ClickPoint to add or remove the check mark.  
When checked, the parameter will function, when  
unchecked, the parameter will not function.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Introduction  
* Scroll bar  
This indicates that the list contains more selections  
or parameters than can be shown in the screen at  
one time. Use the ClickPoint [π][] to move  
within the list.  
Scroll bar  
* Page menu  
In Combination, Program, Global, or Multi modes,  
pressing the [MENU/ OK] button will display a  
list of the pages in that mode.  
To select a page, use the ClickPoint [][®][π][]  
to select the desired page and press the center.  
When “Page Menu Style” = Icon  
When “Page Menu Style” = List  
Note: You can set “Page Menu Style” in the  
GLOBAL 0: System, Preference page.  
* Other objects  
To use slider- or knob-shaped objects, use the  
ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select the desired  
item, and use the VALUE controllers to adjust the  
value.  
Other types of objects are shown in the effect rout-  
ing screen.  
Slider  
Knob  
Routing  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Information  
Basic Information  
You can use the Tone Adjust function to make  
simple edits for the program of a track.  
About the microXmodes  
Assign Programs to each of the 16 MIDI Tracks,  
each with separate volume, pan, EQ, and  
keyboard and velocity zones; make settings for  
effects, and two Arpeggiator (p.69)  
The microX has a wide range of capabilities; it lets  
you play programs/ combinations, edit them, play  
the microX’s sound generator using musical per-  
formance data from an external MIDI sequencer,  
and make settings that affect the entire microX,  
such as transposition and tuning. The largest unit  
used to organize these features is called a mode.  
The microX has four modes.  
Global mode  
Global mode lets you make overall settings for the  
entire microX, and edit arpeggiators, drum kits  
and external control sets. For instance, you can:  
Program mode  
Programs are the basic sounds of microX. In Pro-  
gram mode, you can:  
Make settings that affect the entire microX,  
such as master tune and global MIDI channel  
Create user drum kits, arpeggiators, user scales  
and external control sets  
Select and play Programs  
Edit Programs  
Rename program, and combination categories  
Set the function of the assignable pedals and  
assignable switches  
Make detailed settings for oscillators, filters,  
amps, EGs, LFOs, effects, arpeggiator, etc.  
Make settings for the external control function.  
Create drum programs using drum kits (as cre-  
ated in Global mode)  
Transmit MIDI System Exclusive data dumps  
Play and control one Arpeggiator (p.43)  
Combination mode  
Combinations are sets of up to 8 Programs that  
can be played simultaneously, letting you create  
sounds more complex than a single Program. In  
Combination mode, you can:  
Select and play Combinations  
Use microX as a 8-track multitimbral tone gen-  
erator  
Edit Combinations  
You can use the Tone Adjust function to make  
simple edits for the program of a timbre.  
Assign Programs to each of the 8 Timbres, each  
with separate volume, pan, EQ, and keyboard  
and velocity zones; make settings for effects,  
and Arpeggiator. (p.60)  
Control and play up to two Arpeggiator  
Multi mode  
You can use the microX as a 16-track multi-timbral  
sound generator.  
The microX will receive GM or other performance  
data from an external MIDI sequencer, and play  
back this data.  
Select and playback Multi sets  
Edit Multi sets  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Introduction  
PROGRAM MODE  
OSC 1  
Insert / Master Effect  
Multi Sample - H  
Drum Kit  
MFX 1  
MFX 2  
IFX  
Multi Sample - L  
PITCH1 FILTER1 AMP1  
MEQ  
OSC 2  
Multi Sample - H  
Arpeggiator  
Multi Sample - L  
PITCH2 FILTER2 AMP2  
COMBINATION MODE  
GLOBAL MODE  
Insert /Master Effect  
DRUM KIT  
TIMBRE 1  
TIMBRE 2  
TIMBRE 3  
TIMBRE 4  
TIMBRE 5  
TIMBRE 6  
TIMBRE 7  
TIMBRE 8  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
MFX 1  
MFX 2  
IFX  
Key  
Assign  
Drum Sample / Sample - H  
Drum Sample / Sample - L  
MEQ  
ARPEGGIATOR PATTERN  
User Pattern: Preset-0 - 4  
User Pattern: U000 - 250  
Arpeggiator - A  
Arpeggiatpr - B  
MULTI MODE  
Insert /Master Effect  
TRACK 9 PROGRAM  
TRACK 1 PROGRAM  
MFX 1  
MFX 2  
IFX  
TRACK 10  
TRACK 11  
TRACK 12  
TRACK 13  
TRACK 14  
TRACK 15  
TRACK 16  
TRACK 2  
TRACK 3  
TRACK 4  
TRACK 5  
TRACK 6  
TRACK 7  
TRACK 8  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
MEQ  
Arpeggiator - A  
Arpeggiatpr - B  
PROGRAM  
PROGRAM  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations  
Basic operations  
After youve powered-on the microX, heres how  
to perform basic operations such as selecting  
modes and pages.  
1. Selecting modes  
In order to use a particular function on the  
microX, you must first select the appropriate  
mode.  
2. Selecting pages  
Each mode has a large number of parameters,  
which are grouped into pages. These are further  
subdivided by tabs into up to eight tab pages.  
Press one of the front panel mode buttons to  
enter the corresponding mode.  
PROGRAM [A]–[GM] button: Program mode  
COMBINATION [A]–[C] button:  
Combination mode  
Make sure that the desired mode is selected.  
For details on selecting a mode, see “1.  
Selecting modes,” above.  
[MULTI] button: Multi mode  
[GLOBAL] button: Global mode  
In this explanation well use Combination  
mode as an example.  
When you press one of the PROGRAM [A]–  
[GM] buttons or COMBINATION [A]–[C] but-  
tons, you will enter the selected mode, and the  
corresponding bank will also be selected as  
well as a program or combination within that  
bank.  
Press the COMBINATION [A]–[C] buttons.  
For example if youre editing a program in  
Program mode, and you press a different  
PROGRAM [A]–[GM] button, the program  
will change and the settings you had been  
editing will disappear. The same is true for  
Combination mode, and the settings you had  
been editing will disappear if you press a  
different COMBINATION [A]–[C] button.  
Note: The COMBI 0: Play page will appear. (This is  
shown in the upper left of the display.)  
In Combination, Program, or Multi modes (i.e., in  
other than Global mode), you will normally  
perform in this 0: Play page. You can also make  
simple adjustments (edits) to the sound while  
youre in this page. To make more detailed  
adjustments, use page 1 (COMBI 1: EdTone  
Adjust, etc.) and following.  
For the [GLOBAL] button or [MULTI] button,  
pressing that button once again will take you  
back to the mode and page in which you had  
previously been.  
Selecting a page  
Note: For example, suppose youre editing a  
program in Program mode, and you press the  
[GLOBAL] button to enter Global mode. When  
youve finished editing the Global settings and  
are ready to resume editing the program, press  
the [GLOBAL] button once again to return to  
Program mode. If you return to Program mode  
by pressing the PROGRAM [A]–[GM] of any  
bank other than the bank in which you were  
editing, the settings you had been editing will  
disappear. For this reason, we recommend that  
you return to Program mode by pressing the  
[GLOBAL] button once again, rather than by  
pressing a PROGRAM [A]–[GM] button. The  
same is true for the [MULTI] button.  
Using the page menu to move  
In Combination, Program, Global, and Multi  
modes, you can press the [MENU/ OK] button to  
view a list of the pages that make up that mode.  
1. Press the [MENU/ OK] button.  
The page menu will appear.  
The page in which you were when you pressed  
the [MENU/ OK] button will be highlighted as  
an indication.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Introduction  
2. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select the  
page you want to view.  
3. When youve made your selection, press the  
center of the ClickPoint.  
You will jump to the selected page, and that  
page will appear.  
2. As you repeatedly press the [PAGE+] button or  
[PAGE–] button, you will move consecutively  
through the tabs. As you page up past the last  
tab of a page, you will then move to the first tab  
of the next page. Likewise, as you page down  
past the first tab of a page, you will then move  
to the last tab of the preceding page.  
As an example here, try selecting “Key Zone.”  
The 5: Ed–Key Zone page will appear.  
3. Selecting a parameter and editing  
the value  
Note: The page that appears will be the page of the  
tab you selected most recently.  
Note: If you set the Global mode setting “Page  
Menu Style” to List, you can move by selecting  
pages and tabs as shown in the following  
illustration. (The display shown in step 2 is for  
when “Page Menu Style” = Icon.)  
1. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select the  
parameter you want to edit.  
The value will be highlighted, and the  
parameter name is displayed in the upper right  
of the display. (We call this the “edit cell.”)  
2. To modify the value of the edit cell, use the  
[VALUE] dial or the ClickPoint.  
Note: You can use the [COMPARE] button to  
compare the sound youre editing with the  
original unedited sound.  
Using the [MENU/OK] button +  
[PAGE+][PAGE–] buttons to move  
VALUE controllers  
Hold down the [MENU/ OK] button and press  
the [PAGE+] ([PAGE–] button.  
[VALUE] dial  
Use this dial to edit the selected parameters value.  
In Combination mode, you will move between  
pages in the order of 0: Play 1: EdTone Adjust  
2: EdTrack Parameter 3: EdMIDI Filter1 ↔  
... etc. The page that appears will be the page of  
the tab you selected most recently.  
ClickPoint  
After selecting a parameter expressed as a numeri-  
cal value etc., press the center of the ClickPoint;  
the value will be highlighted, and now you can  
use [π][] to increase or decrease the value. To  
finalize the value, press the center once again.  
[EXIT/CANCEL] button  
You can press the [EXIT/ CANCEL] button to  
return to page 0 from any page.  
If you press the [EXIT/ CANCEL] button while  
pressing the ClickPoint center, the selected value  
will be reset to 0 or the minimum value.  
Selecting tabs  
In addition, you can press the ClickPoint center to  
turn a check box or switch on/ off.  
[PAGE+][PAGE–] buttons  
You can press these buttons to move forward or  
backward in steps of one tab.  
[COMPARE] button  
Use this when you wish to compare the edits you  
have made to a program or combinations sound  
with the un-edited original (i.e., the sound that is  
written into memory).  
1. Press the [PAGE+] button to access the page for  
the next (right) tab. (Press [PAGE–] button to  
access the page for the previous (left) tab.)  
This example shows the Combination page  
through Prog page of COMBI 0: Play.  
When editing a program or combination, press  
this switch. The LED will light, and the last-writ-  
ten settings for that program number or combina-  
tion number will be recalled. When you press the  
[COMPARE] button once again, the LED will go  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Basic operations  
dark and you will return to the settings that you  
were editing.  
5. Writing (saving)  
When youre finished editing, you can save your  
changes if necessary.  
If you edit the settings that are recalled by press-  
ing the [COMPARE] button (i.e., the settings that  
are written into memory), the LED will go dark,  
and it will not be possible to return to the previous  
edits by pressing the [COMPARE] button again.  
For example if youve edited a program, your  
changed will be lost if you select another program  
or turn off the power. The same applies to a com-  
bination or multi set.  
The Compare function is not available in  
Global mode.  
Settings you edit in Global mode will be remem-  
bered as long as the power is on, but your changes  
will be lost when you turn off the power.  
4. Selecting and executing a Utility  
function  
For details on the Write operations, see the follow-  
ing pages.  
Programs p.45  
Combinations p.61  
Multi sets p.75  
Global settings (pages 0–3) p.90  
Drum kits p.110  
The utility functions provide commands that are  
specific to each page, such Write (save) or Copy.  
The available utility functions will depend on the  
page you select.  
Arpeggio patterns p.104  
External control p.112  
Saving data p.117  
For example, the utility functions in Program  
mode let you write (save) the settings, or let you  
perform convenient editing operations such as  
copying settings between oscillators or effects, or a  
Sync function that lets you edit two EGs together.  
1. Press the [UTILITY] button.  
The utility menu will appear.  
2. Use the ClickPoint [π][] to select a  
command.  
3. Press the ClickPoint center.  
A dialog box for the selected utility will appear.  
(Alternatively, you can access the dialog box by  
pressing the [UTILITY] button once again or  
pressing the [MENU/ OK] button.)  
For check-type commands, the status of the  
command will simply change without any  
dialog box appearing.  
4. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select a  
parameter in the dialog box.  
5. To set the parameter value, use the [VALUE]  
dial, or the ClickPoint (press the center and  
then use [π][]).  
6. To execute the utility command, press the  
[MENU/ OK] button.  
If you decide not to execute, press the [EXIT/  
CANCEL] button. The [EXIT/ CANCEL]  
button is the same as “Cancel,” “Done,” or  
“Exit.”  
The dialog box will close.  
If the utility menu is displayed, press the  
[EXIT/ CANCEL] button to close the menu.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Introduction  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup  
Turning the power on/off  
Connecting the AC adapter  
Turning the power on  
You must use only the included AC adapter.  
Using any other AC adapter may cause  
malfunctions.  
1. Turn the microX’s [VOLUME] knob toward the  
left.  
If you have connected powered monitor  
speakers or a stereo amp, turn down the  
volume of these devices.  
Note: Make sure that the microX’s power switch is  
set to STANDBY (the outward position).  
1. Connect the plug of the included AC adapter to  
the power connector on the microX’s rear  
panel.  
2. Press the rear panel Power switch to turn on  
the power.  
The display will show the model name,  
software version.  
2. Connect the power cable to the AC adapter.  
3. Plug the power cable into an AC outlet.  
(The following graphic shows the factory-set  
display. The version number is subject to  
change without notice.)  
4. To prevent the plug from being pulled out  
accidentally, wrap the AC adapter cable  
through the cable hook located on the rear of  
the microX. Be careful not to bend the base of  
the plug unnecessarily.  
Connecting the AC adapter  
3. Turn on your powered monitors or stereo amp.  
4 Cable hook  
Power switch  
4. Turn the microX’s [VOLUME] knob to an  
appropriate position, and adjust the volume of  
your powered monitor speakers or stereo amp.  
1 Power connector  
AC adapter  
Be careful not to  
bend this portion  
excessivelywhen you  
wrap the cable  
through the cable  
hook.  
Note: The state of microX when the power is  
turned on will depend on the setting of “Power  
On Mode” (GLOBAL 0: System, Preference page).  
2
Plug into an AC  
outlet  
3 Power cable  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Setup  
Turning the power off  
After youve finished editing, be sure to write  
(save) your changes.  
If you edit a program and then select a  
different program or turn off the power, the  
changes you made will be lost. The same is  
true for a combination or multi set.  
The settings you edit in Global mode are  
remembered as long as the power is on, but  
will be lost when you turn off the power.  
1. Turn the microX’s [VOLUME] knob toward the  
left.  
Also turn the volume of your powered monitor  
speakers or stereo amp down to zero.  
2. Turn off the power of your powered monitor or  
stereo amp.  
3. Press the rear panel Power switch to turn off  
the power.  
Never turn off the power while data is being  
written into internal memory.  
If the power is turned off while processing is  
being performed, memory write operations  
will not be completed correctly. If this occurs,  
microX will automatically initialize its  
internal memory so that it will operate  
correctly. This is not a malfunction.  
While data is being written, the display will  
indicate “Now writing into internal memory.”  
Data is written into internal memory by the  
following operations.  
Writing (updating) a Program, Combination,  
Multi, Global Setting, Drum Kit, Arpeggio Pat-  
terns, or External Control Setup  
Loading a Preload data for Program, Combina-  
tion, Multi, Global Setting, Drum Kit, Arpeggio  
Patterns, or External Control Setup  
Receiving a MIDI data dump for Program,  
Combination, Multi, Global Setting, Drum Kit  
data, Arpeggio Patterns, or External Control  
Setup  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connections  
Connections  
Connections must be made with the power  
turned off. Please be aware that careless  
operation may damage your speaker system  
or cause malfunctions.  
If you are outputting in stereo, make  
connections to the L/ MONO jack and the R  
jack. If you are outputting in monaural, make  
connections to the L/ MONO jack. We  
recommend that you playback in stereo if  
possible.  
If youre playing back through a stereo audio  
amp or a stereo radio-cassette player that has  
external input jacks, connect these jacks to the  
jacks marked LINE IN, AUX IN, or External  
Input. (You may need to use an adapter plug or  
adapter cable.)  
Basic connections  
Connect the audio cables as shown in the connec-  
tion diagram below.  
Connecting audio output devices  
Here, you can connect a set of amplified monitor  
speakers or your audio system to output microX’s  
sound.  
If you playback microX through your stereo  
audio system, be aware that high volumes  
may damage your speakers. Be careful not to  
raise the volume excessively.  
Connecting the MAIN OUTPUT L/MONO  
and R  
These are the main outputs. They are unbalanced  
phone jacks.  
Connecting INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT 1 and 2  
If desired, you can connect these two individual  
(independent) outputs. They are unbalanced  
phone output jacks.  
These are the main stereo outputs; their volume is  
controlled by the [VOLUME] knob. All of the fac-  
tory Programs and Combis are programmed to  
play through these outputs.  
These jacks allow you to send the microX’s sounds  
to external equipment independent of the (MAIN  
OUTPUT) L/ MONO and R jacks. This can be con-  
venient when recording, or when using a complex  
live performance setup.  
If youre editing a program or combination, or  
playing back from an external MIDI sequencer in  
Multi mode, you can set “BUS Select” to “L/ R” so  
that the sound will be sent from these jacks.  
1. Connect the (INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT) 1 and 2  
jacks to the input jacks of your mixer etc.  
Note: The [VOLUME] knob does not affect the  
1. Connect the (MAIN OUTPUT) L/ MONO and  
R jacks to the INPUT jacks of your powered  
monitor system, mixer etc.  
volume of jacks 1 and 2.  
Note: The sound will be sent from these jacks if  
you set “BUS Select” to 1, 2, or 1/ 2.  
Audio output device connections  
Powered monitors  
INPUT  
INPUT  
Power switch  
L/MONO  
R
Headphones  
PHONES  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Setup  
Headphones  
Connecting a damper pedal,  
foot switch, or foot pedal  
Powered monitors  
PHONES  
Mixer  
By connecting an optional damper pedal, foot  
switch, or foot pedal, you can control even more  
functions and effects.  
INPUT  
INPUT  
1
R
L/MONO  
2
PEDAL  
SWITCH  
DAMPER  
Connecting a damper pedal  
Headphones  
This pedal can provide a damper effect as you  
play. This instrument also supports half-damping.  
Heres how to connect an optional Korg DS-1H  
damper pedal to the DAMPER jack and use it to  
control the half-damper effect.  
1. When using headphones, plug them into the  
headphones jack located on the front panel.  
Use the [VOLUME] knob to adjust the volume  
of the headphones. The microX’s headphone  
jack carries the same signal as the (MAIN  
OUTPUT) L/ MONO and R output jacks.  
1. Connect an separately sold DS-1H damper  
pedal to the DAMPER jack.  
Note: If you want to monitor the (INDIVIDUAL  
OUTPUT) 1 and 2 jacks in addition to the main  
outputs, an external mixer may be required.  
Youll be able to control the half-damper effect  
if youve connected the DS-1H. If youve  
connected a different switch-type pedal, it will  
function as a damper switch.  
2. After you turn on the power, set the switch  
polarity and adjust the half-damper response to  
ensure that the half-damper pedal works  
correctly. (PG p.77, 80)  
Connecting a foot switch  
If you connect an on/ off-type foot switch such as  
the Korg PS-1 pedal switch to the ASSIGNABLE  
SWITCH jack, you can use it to turn the sostenuto  
or soft pedal effect on/ off, to turn the arpeggiator  
on/ off, to switch programs or combinations, to  
control tap tempo, or to apply modulation to a  
sounds or an effect.  
This switch will always function in the same way  
regardless of the program, combination, or multi  
set youve selected. You can assign the function in  
the Global mode 0: System, Foot page.  
1. Connect a foot switch such as the separately  
sold PS-1 to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack.  
2. After turning the power on, use GLOBAL 0:  
System, Foot page “Foot SW Assign” and “Foot  
SW Polarity” to assign the function controlled  
by the foot switch and to specify the polarity.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Connecting a computer  
Connecting a foot pedal  
Connecting a computer  
You can connect the microX to your computer and  
use it as both an input keyboard and a MIDI  
sound module.  
If you connect a separately sold EXP-2 foot con-  
troller or XVP-10 expression/ volume pedal to the  
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack, you can use it to  
apply modulation to sounds or effects, or to adjust  
the overall volume.  
You can also use the included editor to edit the  
microX from your computer.  
This pedal will always function in the same way  
regardless of the program, combination, or multi  
set youve selected. You can assign the function in  
the Global mode 0: System, Foot page.  
You can connect the microX to your computer in  
either of the following ways.  
Use a USB cable  
1. Connect an separately sold XVP-10 or EXP-2 to  
Note: Use the KORG USB-MIDI Driver if you’re  
connecting the microX via USB to a computer  
that meets the requirements described in  
“KORG USB-MIDI Driver operating  
requirements,” below.  
the ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jacks.  
2. After turning the power on, use GLOBAL 0:  
System, Foot page “Foot Pedal Assign” to  
assign the function controlled by the foot pedal.  
Use a commercially available MIDI interface,  
and connect the microX via its MIDI connec-  
tors.  
Operating requirements for the  
KORG USB-MIDI Driver and the edi-  
tor software  
Contents of the CD-ROM  
microX Editor/ Plug-In Editor  
(for Windows XP / Mac OS X)  
KORG USB-MIDI Driver  
(for Windows XP / Mac OS X)  
microX External Control Template  
Parameter Guide (PDF)  
Editor/ Plug-In Editor Manual (PDF)  
microX External Control Template List (PDF)  
Software License Agreement (PDF)  
Please note before use  
Copyright to all software included in this prod-  
uct is the property of Korg Inc.  
The license agreement for this software is pro-  
vided separately. You must read this license  
agreement before you install this software.  
Your installation of this software will be taken  
to indicate your acceptance of this agreement.  
KORG USB-MIDI Driver operating  
requirements  
Windows:  
Computer  
A computer with a USB port, that satisfies the  
requirements of Microsoft Windows XP  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Setup  
Operating system  
Windows XP:  
Installing the KORG USB-MIDI Driver  
and the editor software  
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition,  
Professional or x64 Edition (The driver for x64  
Edition is a Beta version.)  
Macintosh:  
microX/X50 application installation  
The microX application installer automatically  
installs the KORG USB-MIDI Driver Tools and  
microX Editor/ Plug-In Editor that are provided  
on the included CD-ROM.  
Computer  
An Apple Macintosh with a USB port that  
satisfies the requirements of Mac OS X  
Operating system  
Note: You must install the KORG USB-MIDI  
Driver Tools before you connect the microX to  
your computer via USB.  
Mac OS X version 10.3 or later  
Please be aware that in the case of some  
computers, the system may not function  
correctly even if your computer meets the  
above requirements.  
1. Insert the included CD-ROM into your CD-  
ROM drive.  
Normally the “microX/ X50 Application  
Installer” will start up automatically.  
microX Editor/Plug-In Editor operating  
requirements  
If your computer is set so the installer does not  
run automatically, double-click  
“KorgSetup.exe” on the CD-ROM.  
You must install the KORG USB-MIDI Driver  
if you want to connect the microX to your  
computer via USB and use the microX Editor/  
Plug-In Editor.  
2. From the list, select [KORG microX  
SYNTHESIZER/ CONTROLLER], and click  
[Next >].  
It is not possible to run multiple instances of  
microX Editor/ Plug-In Editor on the  
operating system. This means that it is not  
possible to use these editors to edit two or  
more microX units simultaneously.  
Windows:  
Computer  
CPU: Pentium III/ 1 GHz or better  
Memory: 256 MB or more  
Monitor: 1,024 × 768 pixels, 16-bit color or  
better  
3. From the list, select the applications that you  
want to install, and click [Install].  
A computer with a USB port, that satisfies the  
requirements of Microsoft Windows XP  
If you want to install the preloaded application  
template files for external control, click  
“microX External Control templates” to select  
it.  
Operating system  
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition or  
Professional, Service Pack 1 or later  
Macintosh:  
Computer  
CPU: Apple G4/ 400 MHz or better  
Memory: 256 MB or more  
Monitor: 1,024 × 768 pixels, 32,000 colors or  
better  
An Apple Macintosh with a USB port that  
satisfies the requirements of Mac OS X  
The applications you selected will be  
successively installed.  
Operating system  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to install each  
Mac OS X version 10.3.9 or later  
application.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting a computer  
If youve made settings as shown in the screen  
shot for step 2, the KORG USB MIDI Driver  
Tools Installer screen will appear first.  
• Click [Next >].  
• The “License agreement” will appear. Care-  
fully read the contents, and if you agree,  
check “I accept the terms of the license agree-  
ment” and click [Next>].  
• When youve finished installing the applica-  
tion(s) you want, click [Exit installer] to exit  
the installer.  
6. When all the selected applications have been  
installed, click [Finish] to exit the installer.  
• Specify the installation destination. The  
screen will show the installation destination  
folder. If you want to change this, click  
[Change] and select the desired installation  
destination.  
7. The first time you connect the microX to the  
USB port of your computer, the standard USB-  
MIDI driver provided by Windows will be  
installed automatically.  
• Click [Next >] to begin the installation.  
• When the installation is complete, click [Fin-  
ish] to exit the installer.  
Install the next application in the same way.  
If you want to use the KORG USB-MIDI Driver  
for Windows XP, please re-install the driver  
manually using the procedure described below.  
5. If you selected microX Editor/ Plug-In Editor in  
step 2, choose the application(s) you want to  
install.  
• Successively select and install the Editor  
(Standalone), Plug-In Editor (VST), and/ or  
Plug-In Editor (RTAS) as desired.  
Setting up the KORG USB-MIDI Driver  
1. Before you perform the procedure below, you  
must finish installing KORG USB-MIDI Driver  
Tools into your computer.  
For example if you want to install the stand-  
alone version, click [Install Stand-alone  
version]. Then follow the on-screen  
directions to perform the installation, and  
click [Close] when the installation has been  
successfully completed.  
Then restart the operating system of your  
computer, and power-on the microX. (p.23)  
Note: The driver must be installed for each USB  
port. If you connect the microX to a different  
USB port than the one you used when  
installing KORG USB-MIDI Driver for  
Windows, you will need to use the same  
procedure to install the driver again.  
If you want to install a plug-in version, click  
in the Installer screen to select the format of  
plug-in that you want to install, and perform  
the installation.  
2. Using a USB cable, connect the USB connector  
of the microX to the USB connector of your  
computer.  
Make sure that the plug is oriented correctly,  
and push it all the way into the connector.  
Windows will detect that the microX has been  
connected.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup  
Note: For details on installation and setup, and on  
uninstallation, see the “Installation manual”  
(HTML) on your computer. To view the  
“Installation manual,” click from your taskbars  
[Start] [All Programs] [KORG] [KORG  
USB-MIDI Driver Tools] [Installation manual].  
Then the standard driver will be installed  
automatically.  
About the microX and driver ports  
KEYBOARD port  
Applications on your computer use this port to  
receive MIDI messages from the microX (data  
from the keyboard and controllers).  
3. In the task bar, choose [Start] [All Programs]  
[KORG] [KORG USB-MIDI Driver Tools]  
[Install KORG USB-MIDI Device] to start up  
the setup utility.  
SOUND port  
Applications on your computer use this port to  
send MIDI messages to the microX’s internal  
sound generator, making it produce sound.  
The KORG USB-MIDI devices currently  
connected to your computer will be shown in  
the list above. The lower area will show the  
version of the KORG USB-MIDI Driver that  
you will be installing. Select microX in the list  
above, and click [Install]. Driver installation  
will begin.  
Setting up the microX Editor/Plug-In  
Editor  
For details on setting up and using the microX  
Editor/ Plug-In Editor, see “Editor/ Plug-In Editor  
Manual” (PDF).  
About the microX external control tem-  
plates  
See “microX External Control Template List”  
(PDF) for details on the control change (CC#) set-  
tings assigned by the preloaded external control  
templates and the application settings to which  
they correspond.  
4. If a warning dialog box regarding digital  
signature authentication appears during the  
installation, click [Continue] to continue the  
installation.  
5. Driver installation has been completed. Click  
[Finish] to exit the installer. If you are asked  
whether you want to restart Windows now,  
choose [Yes] to restart.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting a computer  
7. The “Easy Installation” dialog box will appear.  
Mac OS X:  
Click [Install].  
Installing the KORG USB-MIDI driver  
and editor software  
8. Depending on the version of your operating  
system, a confirmation dialog box may appear  
at this point. If so, enter your password and  
click [OK].  
Installing the KORG USB-MIDI Driver  
9. When the installation has been successfully  
Note: Use the KORG USB-MIDI Driver if you are  
connecting the microX via USB to a computer that  
completed, click [Close] to exit the installer.  
About the microX and driver ports  
1. Insert the included CD-ROM into your CD-  
KEYBOARD port  
ROM drive.  
Applications on your computer use this port to  
receive MIDI messages from the microX (data  
from the keyboard and controllers).  
2. In the CD-ROM, navigate to the “KORG USB-  
MIDI Driver” folder, and double-click “KORG  
USB-MIDI Driver.pkg” to start up the installer.  
SOUND port  
Applications on your computer use this port to  
send MIDI messages to the microX’s internal  
sound generator, making it produce sound.  
3. Depending on the version of your operating  
system, a confirmation dialog box may appear  
at this point. If so, enter your password and  
click [OK]. When the installer starts up, the  
following screen will appear. Click [Continue].  
Installing the microX Editor/Plug-In Edi-  
tor  
To install the software in Mac OS X, proceed as fol-  
lows.  
1. Insert the included CD-ROM into your CD-  
ROM drive.  
2. In the CD-ROM, navigate to the “microX  
Editor” folder, and double-click “microX Editor  
Installer.pkg” to start up the installer.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to install  
application.  
See “Installing the KORG USB-MIDI Driver.”  
4. “Import information” will appear. Read the  
4. When the installation has been successfully  
contents, and click [Continue].  
completed, click [Restart].  
5. The “License agreement” will appear. Carefully  
Note: If youre using Mac OS X, the plug-in version  
will also be installed in the appropriate folder.  
read the contents, and click [Continue].  
A dialog box will ask whether you accept the  
terms of the license agreement. If you accept,  
click [Agree].  
Setting up the microX Editor/Plug-In  
Editor  
For details on setting up and using the microX  
Editor/ Plug-In Editor, see “Editor/ Plug-In Editor  
Manual” (PDF).  
6. A screen where you can choose the  
“Installation destination” will appear. Choose  
the installation destination and click  
[Continue].  
Installing the microX External Control  
Temperate  
To install the software in Mac OS X, proceed as fol-  
lows.  
1. Insert the included CD-ROM into your CD-  
ROM drive.  
2. In the “microX External Control” folder on the  
CD-ROM, double-click “microX External  
Control.pkg” to start up the installer.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setup  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to install  
Connecting to your computer via  
MIDI  
application.  
Heres how to connect the microX to your com-  
puter via a commercially available MIDI interface.  
4. When the installation has been successfully  
completed, click [Close] to exit the installer.  
1. Connect the microX’s MIDI OUT connector and  
MIDI IN connector to your computer via the  
MIDI interface.  
About the microX external control tem-  
plates  
See “microX External Control Template List”  
(PDF) for details on the control change (CC#) set-  
tings assigned by the preloaded external control  
templates and the application settings to which  
they correspond.  
For details on how to use your MIDI interface,  
see its owners manual.  
Some models of USB-MIDI interface may be  
unable to transmit or receive the microX’s  
MIDI exclusive messages.  
Computer  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
MIDI interface  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
Connecting via the microX’s USB  
connector, and setting-up  
microX  
USB connector (for connecting to com-  
puter)  
If you connect the microX’s USB connector to your  
computer, youll be able to send and receive note  
data and other performance information and  
sound settings between your computer and the  
microX as MIDI messages.  
2. Make the necessary settings in the microX’s  
Global mode.  
See “Global mode settings on the microX,”  
below.  
Global mode settings on the microX  
Note: The USB connector of the microX is only able  
to transmit and receive MIDI data.  
Local Control On settings  
Note: Use the KORG USB-MIDI Driver if you’re  
connecting the microX via USB to a computer that  
meets the requirements described in “KORG USB-  
MIDI Driver operating requirements.”  
Turn on the Echo Back function of the external  
MIDI/ USB sequencer or computer (so that data  
received at MIDI IN will be re-transmitted from  
MIDI OUT/ USB), and turn off the microX’s Local  
Control setting (so that microX’s keyboard and  
tone generator will be internally disconnected).  
1. Using a USB cable, connect the USB connector  
of the microX to the USB connector of your  
computer.  
When you play the keyboard of the microX, the  
musical data will be transmitted to the external  
MIDI sequencer or computer, and then echoed  
back to play the microX tone generator. In other  
words, by turning Local Control OFF, you can pre-  
vent notes from being sounded in duplicate, as  
would otherwise occur if a note were sounded by  
the microX’s own keyboard and again by the data  
that was echoed-back.  
Make sure that the plug is oriented correctly,  
and push it all the way into the connector.  
Computer  
USB cable  
USB  
microX  
If the arpeggiator function is on, playing the  
microX’s keyboard will not cause the arpeggiator  
to operate, and only the musical data produced by  
playing the keyboard will be transmitted. The  
arpeggiator will operate only in response to the  
notes that are echoed-back and received at MIDI  
IN. In this way, turning off Local Control prevents  
the arpeggiator from operating in duplicate.  
Use this setting when you wish to record on the  
external MIDI sequencer or computer only the  
notes that trigger the arpeggiator, and to use the  
2. Make the necessary settings in the microX’s  
Global mode.  
See “Global mode settings on the microX,”  
below.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connecting a computer  
echoed-back notes to operate the arpeggiator  
while monitoring your recording or during play-  
back.  
above-listed settings will affect the MIDI data  
that is transmitted.  
Incoming MIDI data will be handled with  
settings equivalent to “Key Transpose” 0 and  
Velocity Curve” 4.  
Note: If you want the note data produced by the  
arpeggiator to be recorded on the external  
sequencer/ computer, set Local Control on, and  
turn off the Echo Back setting of the external  
sequencer/ computer.  
When controlling the microX’s tone generator  
from an external MIDI device, select PostMIDI.  
The above-listed settings will affect the MIDI  
data that is received.  
The default setting for Local Control is On. To turn  
off Local Control, the “Local Control On” (GLO-  
BAL 1: MIDI page) check box to uncheck it (PG  
p.82).  
Outgoing MIDI data will be handled with  
settings equivalent to “Key Transpose” 0 and  
Velocity Curve” 4.  
When using the microX by itself, leave Local Con-  
trol turned on. (If this is off when microX is used  
by itself, playing the keyboard will not produce  
sound.)  
The default settings are “Key Transpose” +00,  
Velocity Curve” 4 (Normal), and “Convert Posi-  
tion” PreMIDI.  
Note: The microX’s Local Control setting can be  
turned Off by the Local Control Off message sent  
from the editor when you start up microX Plug-In  
Editor.  
“Multi Mode”setting  
You will normally use Multi mode when youre  
using the microX as a multi-timbral sound module  
to simultaneously play multiple tracks from an  
external MIDI sequencer. However, you can also  
use Multi mode when you want to use the microX  
as a master keyboard to control an external MIDI  
sound module. (Normally you will use Combina-  
tion mode if youre using the microX as a master  
keyboard.)  
MIDI IN  
USB  
MIDI OUT  
USB  
MIDI IN  
USB  
MIDI OUT  
USB  
Sound gener-  
ator section  
Trigger  
Sequencer or  
computer  
(Echo Back on)  
Arpeggiator  
OFF  
ON  
This connection  
is broken when  
you turn Local  
Control off.  
Depending on which of these two situations  
describes your needs, you can set the “Multi  
Mode” setting in the GLOBAL 0: System, Prefer-  
ence page so that the microX will operate opti-  
mally for your situation.  
Keyboard  
MIDI Filter “Exclusivesetting  
for Ext-Seq is the setting you should choose when  
using the microX as a multi-timbral sound mod-  
ule. When you switch multi sets on the microX,  
tracks whose “Status” is EXT or BTH will not  
transmit MIDI messages such as program  
changes. This will avoid the undesired situation of  
the echo back from your external MIDI sequencer  
switching microX tracks of the identical channel to  
the same program, pan, and volume settings etc.  
If you want the microX to transmit and receive  
system exclusive data, you must check the GLO-  
BAL 1: MIDI page MIDI Filter “Exclusive” check  
box. Check this box if the microX is connected to  
your computer and you want to edit the microX  
from your computer (or bi-directionally). You  
must also check this box if youre using the  
microX Editor/ Plug-In Editor. By default, the  
MIDI Filter “Exclusive” setting is checked.  
for Master is the setting you should choose when  
using the microX as a master keyboard. In this  
case when you switch multi sets on the microX,  
tracks whose “Status” is EXT or BTH will transmit  
program changes and other MIDI messages to set  
up your external MIDI sound module.  
The “Convert Position”setting  
On the microX, the parameters “Key Transpose”  
and “Velocity Curve” (GLOBAL 0: System, Basic  
page) allow you to transpose the pitch, adjust the  
velocity sensitivity.  
The “Convert Position” setting (GLOBAL 1: MIDI  
page) specifies the point at which these settings  
affect the data from the keyboard and the data  
sent or received via MIDI IN/ USB or MIDI OUT/  
USB.  
Making settings in Global mode  
Heres how to set parameters in Global mode.  
1. Press the [GLOBAL] button (the button will  
light) to enter Global mode.  
2. Press the [MENU/ OK] button to access the  
When controlling an external MIDI tone gener-  
page menu.  
ator from the microX, select Pre MIDI. The  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Setup  
Example connections when using  
the microX Editor/Plug-In Editor  
If you want to mix the microX’s audio signals with  
the audio signals sent from your host application  
via your audio interface, or with audio signals  
from another sound module, make connections as  
shown below.  
3. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select a  
page, and press the ClickPoint center.  
Local Control On  
MIDI Filter Exclusive  
Convert Position  
Powered monitors  
Choose “MIDI” if you want to make these  
settings.  
INPUT  
INPUT  
The GLOBAL 1: MIDI page will appear.  
Audio interface  
USB cable  
Multi Mode  
1
Choose “System” if you want to make these  
settings.  
Computer  
USB  
L/MONO  
R
2
One of the GLOBAL 0: System pages will  
appear. Use the [PAGE+][PAGE–] buttons to  
select the Preference page.  
microX  
If you want to apply a plug-in effect to the  
microX’s audio signals, or to control the microX’s  
audio signals in your host application together  
with the audio data from the KORG Legacy Col-  
lection or other audio tracks, make connections as  
shown below. Make settings as appropriate for the  
host application youre using.  
4. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select the  
parameter whose setting you want to change.  
For “Local Control On” or “Exclusive,” select  
the parameter and press the ClickPoint center  
to switch the parameter on/ off.  
For details on setup, see “Editor/ Plug-In Editor  
Manual” (PDF).  
For the “Local Control On” parameter, local  
control will be off when the box is unchecked.  
Powered monitors  
For “Convert Position” and “Multi Mode,”  
select the parameter and turn the [VALUE] dial  
to change the setting.  
INPUT  
INPUT  
Audio  
interface  
USB cable  
1
Computer  
USB  
R
L/MONO  
2
microX  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting MIDI devices  
Controlling microX’s tone generator  
from an external MIDI device  
When you wish to play or control the microX’s  
tone generator from an external MIDI keyboard or  
sequencer etc., use a MIDI cable to connect the  
MIDI OUT connector of the external MIDI device  
to the MIDI IN connector of microX.  
Connecting MIDI devices  
By connecting the microX’s MIDI connectors to an  
external MIDI device you can transfer sound set-  
tings and performance data such as note messages  
between your external MIDI device and the  
microX.  
About MIDI  
MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Inter-  
face, and is a world-wide standard for exchanging  
various types of musical data between electronic  
musical instruments and computers. When MIDI  
cables are used to connect two or more MIDI  
devices, performance data can be exchanged  
between the devices, even if they were made by  
different manufacturers.  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
microX  
MIDI keyboard  
Controlling two or more external  
MIDI tone generators from microX  
You can also use a MIDI patch bay to control mul-  
tiple MIDI devices.  
MIDI connectors  
MIDI IN:  
This connector receives MIDI data.  
microX  
Use this to play the microX from another MIDI  
device, or from an external sequencer.  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
MIDI IN  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI patch bay  
MIDI keyboard  
MIDI IN  
MIDI tone generator  
MIDI OUT:  
This connector transmits MIDI data.  
Connecting an external MIDI  
sequencer  
You can connect the microX to your external MIDI  
sequencer and use it both as an input keyboard  
and as a MIDI sound module.  
Use this to control external MIDI devices, or to  
record into an external sequencer.  
1. Connect the microX’s MIDI OUT connector to  
your MIDI sequencers MIDI IN connector, and  
connect the sequencers MIDI OUT connector  
to the microX’s MIDI IN connector.  
Controlling an external MIDI tone  
generator from microX  
When you wish to use the microX’s keyboard,  
controllers, and arpeggiator etc. to play an exter-  
nal MIDI tone generator, use a MIDI cable to con-  
nect microX’s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI  
IN connector of the external MIDI tone generator.  
2. Make the necessary settings in the microX’s  
Global mode.  
MIDI  
sequencer  
MIDI IN  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
MIDI OUT  
microX  
MIDI keyboard  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
microX  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setup  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing and Editing Programs  
receiving MIDI messages from multiple tracks of  
your MIDI sequencer or other DAW program.  
Whats a Program?  
Programs are the basic sounds of the microX.  
This section of the manual takes a quick look at  
playing Programs, including tours of the front-  
panel controllers and basic editing techniques.  
Programs are important elements of other modes  
as well. In Combination mode you can combine  
multiple programs to create complex sounds, and  
in Multi mode you can play multiple programs by  
Playing programs  
The bank number you specified is shown below  
“PROG 0: Play.”  
Selecting programs  
Mode name Page number and name  
Category number  
Parameter name  
Tempo  
There are several different ways to select pro-  
grams. Each one is convenient in a different way:  
Tab name  
and name  
Bank  
Selecting programs from the front panel:  
Using “Program Select” to select a program  
number  
Program  
Select  
(program  
number  
and name)  
·
·
Turn the [VALUE] dial.  
Press the center of the ClickPoint to high-  
light the field, then use [π][] to select a  
program, and press the center to finalize  
your selection.  
Tab  
Knob B assign list  
2. Make sure that “Program Select” (program  
number and name) is selected.  
·
Use the PROGRAM [A]–[GM] buttons to  
select a program bank.  
If this is not selected, use the ClickPoint [π][]  
to highlight the “Program Select” indication.  
Selecting programs by program category  
3. Use the [VALUE] dial etc. to select the program  
you want to play.  
You can select programs by categories such as  
piano or drums. (p.38)  
Selecting programs by using a foot-switch:  
1, 4  
You can change programs even while both  
hands are busy playing on the keyboard -  
convenient for live applications.  
5
2
3
Selecting programs by receiving MIDI pro-  
gram changes:  
You can switch programs from an external  
MIDI sequencer or an external MIDI controller.  
See below for details.  
You can use the following methods to select a pro-  
gram.  
Turn the [VALUE] dial.  
Selecting programs from the front  
panel  
Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight  
the field, then use [π][] to select a program,  
and press the center to finalize your selection.  
1. Press a PROGRAM [A]–[GM] button. (The  
button will light.)  
4. Press a PROGRAM [A]–[GM] button to switch  
You will enter Program mode, and the bank  
you specified will be selected. Notice that the  
upper line of the display indicates “PROG 0:  
Play” (mode name, page number and name).  
banks.  
When you select a different Bank, the buttons  
LED will light, and the selected bank will  
appear on the left side of the display.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Playing and Editing Programs  
For example, to select bank B, press the  
PROGRAM [B] button. The [B] button will  
light, and the name Bank B will appear in the  
left of the display.  
Selecting by Category  
You can select Programs from within a category,  
such as keyboard, organ, bass, and drums.  
When shipped from the factory, the preloaded  
Programs are organized into 16 categories.  
Each time you press the [GM] button, the bank  
will alternate as shown below.  
In the PROG 0: Play page you can select programs  
by category as follows.  
Gg(d)Gg(d)G…  
Auditioning the sound  
Using [CATEGORY] and the PROGRAM/  
COMBINATION buttons to select  
1. Press the [CATEGORY] button.  
5. Play a note on the keyboard to hear the sound  
you selected.  
Alternatively, you can press the [AUDITION]  
button (the button will light) to turn on the  
Audition function and the microX will  
automatically play a riff (phrase) suitable for  
the selected program.  
The category menu will appear. The categories  
are displayed in the left side of the screen, and a  
list of the programs in the selected category are  
displayed in the right side.  
Category No.  
Sel (Select)  
Overview: Program Banks  
When shipped from the factory, it is loaded with  
640 Programs. You can also save any programs  
that you create.  
Programs are organized into six banks as shown in  
the following table.  
Program banks  
Category  
Program  
Prog.  
No.  
2. Press the PROGRAM [A]–[GM] or COMBINATION  
Bank  
Explanation  
[A]–[C] button for the desired category.  
With the factory settings, these  
banks contain a wide variety of  
preloaded programs that use  
the internal PCM ROM  
The category you specify will be selected. A  
category name is printed below each bank  
button.  
for  
A, B,  
C, D, E 127  
000…  
preloaded multisamples, effects, and  
programs arpeggio patterns.  
128 programs can be written or  
rewritten to each bank (for a  
total of 640).  
Note: This method lets you select up to nine  
categories.  
You can use the [PAGE+][PAGE–] buttons to  
step through the categories one by one.  
001… GM  
These banks contain 128 GM  
programs programs and nine GM drum  
programs that are compatible  
with the GM sound map.The  
programs of these banks are  
read-only.  
G
3. By using the [VALUE] dial or the ClickPoint  
[π][] to select programs, you can step  
through the programs in the same category.  
128  
4. Press the [MENU/ OK] button to confirm your  
selection. If you decide not to select a program,  
press the [EXIT/ CANCEL] button.  
Bank G contains the GM  
001… GM2drum  
programs. G lets you select 128  
programs numbered from 001–  
128, and g(d) lets you select  
nine drum programs.  
You cant write (save) data to  
these banks.  
g(d)  
128  
programs  
1
2
3
3
4
Note: You can also switch categories by using the  
ClickPoint [][®] to select “Category No.” in the  
top line of the category menu and then turning the  
[VALUE] dial.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Selecting programs  
Using a footswitch to select Pro-  
grams  
Using MIDI program change mes-  
sages to select programs  
You can assign a footswitch to step through Pro-  
grams one by one, either going up (0, 1, 2, 3, etc.)  
or going down (3, 2, 1 etc.).  
By sending MIDI program change messages along  
with MIDI bank select messages to the microX  
from an external MIDI device (a MIDI sequencer  
such as a DAW program, or a MIDI controller,  
etc.), you can select any program in the seven  
banks.  
This lets you change Programs without using your  
hands–great for quick Program changes in live  
performance situations.  
You can also install the included “microX Plug-In  
Editor” into your DAW program as a plug-in, and  
easily select microX programs or combinations  
from a list within your DAW. For more details, see  
“Editor/ Plug-In Editor Manual” (PDF).  
To set this up:  
1. Connect a foot switch to the rear-panel  
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack.  
Use a simple on/ off footswitch, such as the  
optional KORG PS-1.  
2. Press the [GLOBAL] button to enter Global  
MIDI channel setting  
mode.  
In order to play the microX via MIDI, the transmit-  
ting device (MIDI sequencer or computer) and  
receiving device (the microX) must be set to the  
matching MIDI channel. In Program mode, the  
microX receives data on the global MIDI channel.  
3. Press the [EXIT] button to access the GLOBAL  
0: System page.  
4. Press the [PAGE+] button to access the Foot tab.  
1. Make sure that the microX and your external  
MIDI device or computer are connected  
correctly.  
For details on connections, see p.27.  
2. Press the [GLOBAL] button to enter Global  
5. Select “Foot SW Assign,” and specify either  
mode.  
Program Up or Program Down.  
3. Press the [MENU] button to access the PAGE  
Program Up lets you select the next higher  
program number each time you press the foot  
switch.  
MENU.  
4. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select  
“MIDI,” and press the center.  
Program Down lets you select the next lower  
program number each time you press the foot  
switch.  
The GLOBAL 1: MIDI page will appear.  
6. Set the “Foot SW Polarity” to the polarity of the  
pedal youve connected.  
If youve connected a separately sold PS-1  
pedal switch, choose the (–) KORG Standard  
setting.  
5. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select  
“MIDI Channel,” and use the [VALUE] dial to  
specify the global MIDI channel.  
With these settings, you will step through the  
programs one at a time each time you press the  
foot switch.  
With the default settings, the global MIDI  
channel “MIDI Channel” is set to 01.  
If you want this setting to be remembered even  
after you turn off the power, be sure to write  
the changes you made. (p.45)  
Selecting programs  
To switch programs, send a MIDI program change  
from your external MIDI device or computer.  
7. Use the PROGRAM [A]–[GM] buttons to enter  
PROG 0: Play, and press the foot switch; the  
program will change.  
To switch banks, send a Bank Select control  
change message (CC#0: upper byte, CC#32: lower  
byte). The microX will switch to the program of  
the specified bank at the time that it receives a pro-  
gram change following the bank select message.  
Note: This setting applies to selecting Combinations,  
as well.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Playing and Editing Programs  
Bank  
Select  
CC#0  
Bank  
Select  
CC#32  
Keyboard  
microX  
Bank #  
microX  
Program #  
Program #  
Velocity  
A
B
C
D
E
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
63  
63  
63  
63  
63  
121  
56  
0
0
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
0 – 127  
How hard you play the keyboard affects the expres-  
siveness of the sound. You can adjust the volume  
level setting so that playing the keyboard softly will  
produce a soft sound, and playing hard will pro-  
duce a loud sound. In addition, you can also adjust  
the brightness of the sound and the envelope set-  
tings such as attack rate and release time.  
1
0 – 127  
2
0 – 127  
3
0 – 127  
4
1 – 128  
0, 1 – 9  
1 – 128: R  
1 – 128: (XG) R  
0
0, 1  
0
Using Velocity Switch in Combination Play mode  
and Multi mode, you can play different Programs  
by changing the keyboard velocity.  
G
0
1 – 128: (GS) R  
1
0
See PROG 6: EdAmp1/ 2, Mod (p.55, PG  
p.21) for information on how to change the vol-  
ume level and envelope using key velocity.  
1 – 128  
120  
62  
0
g(d)  
1 – 128: R  
0
See PROG 4: EdFilter1/ 2, Basic, Mod.1  
(p.54, PG p.16) for information on how to  
change the brightness and tonal color of the  
sound using key velocity.  
Note: In bank G, program numbers 000 through  
127 correspond to 001–128.  
Note: “R” (Receive) indicates that only reception is  
See PROG 2: EdPitch, OSC1/ 2 (PG p.10) for  
information on how to control the pitch change  
using key velocity.  
supported.  
Note: Bank select messages will not be transmitted  
or received if the GLOBAL 1: MIDI page MIDI  
Filter “Bank” is unchecked.  
Note Number  
Note: The table above describes the operation with  
Bank Map” set to GM. For details on the KORG  
mapping (PG p.78).  
Sounds can be programmed to change in character  
based on the note being played. As you play  
higher or lower on the keyboard, the note number  
can modulate the timbre–such as becoming  
brighter as you play higher. Envelopes may also  
become faster or slower; the volume may change;  
and so on.  
Using Controllers  
The microX provides realtime controllers such as a  
joystick and OCTAVE [][π] buttons that let you  
make your performances more expressive.  
Joystick  
These controls let you modify the tone, pitch, vol-  
ume, effects, etc. in realtime while you play.  
You can use the joystick to vary the pitch or adjust  
the depth of modulation. The actual result will  
depend on the program, but these controllers are  
normally used to apply the following effects.  
For example, a piano sound can be played realisti-  
cally using only the keyboard, but your perfor-  
mance will be more expressive if you connect a  
damper pedal. If youre playing guitar or wind  
instrument sounds, you can use the joystick to  
control the pitch or to apply vibrato.  
+Y  
Deepen the vibrato  
Note: In the pages that follow, our explanation will  
center on the dedicated functionality of each  
controller. However, you can also use these  
controllers as sources for “alternate modulation”  
or “effect dynamic modulation,” giving you a  
much wider range of possible uses than we  
describe here. For details on these capabilities, see  
p.151.  
–X  
Lower the  
pitch  
+X  
Raise the  
pitch  
–Y  
Deepen the wah effect  
Joystick movement in the +X/ –X axis can  
adjust the amount of pitch bend  
PROG 2: Ed–Pitch, OSC1 (p.52, PG p.10)  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using Controllers  
Joystick movement in the +X/ –X axis can vary  
the cutoff frequency  
PROG 4: Ed–Filter1/ 2, Mod.2 (PG p.16)  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2], [3], [4],  
[SELECT]  
Use the [SELECT] button to select realtime con-  
troller mode A/ B/ C, and use knobs [1]–[4] to con-  
trol the tone, effects, MIDI control changes, and  
arpeggiator etc. while you perform.  
Joystick movement in the +Y axis can adjust the  
depth of vibrato  
PROG 2: Ed–Pitch, OSC 1/ 2 LFO (p.52, PG  
p.11)  
Joystick movement in the –Y axis can adjust the  
depth of the wah effect  
PROG 4: Ed–Filter1/ 2, LFO Mod. (p.54, PG  
p.18)  
Specifically, you can use these controllers to edit  
the filter cutoff frequency, resonance, amp and fil-  
ter EQ, volume, portamento time, pan, pitch LFO,  
and master effect send level, etc. You can also use  
them to modify the arpeggiator tempo, gate,  
velocity, and length. For more details, see p.43 and  
Joystick movement in the +Y axis can adjust the  
speed of the LFO  
PROG 3: Ed–LFOs, OSC 1/ 2 LFO 1/ 2 (PG  
p.14)  
1. Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT]  
button to switch the function of the realtime  
controllers to A-mode, B-mode, or C-mode.  
OCTAVE  
2. Rotate the desired knob to control the sound,  
These buttons shift the range of pitches assigned  
to the keyboard in one-octave steps over a range  
of ±3 octaves.  
etc.  
The REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2], [3], and [4]  
knob B-mode functions can be viewed for Program  
mode in the 0: Play, Program page; for Combina-  
tion mode in the 0: Play, Combination page; and  
Pressing the [π] button will raise the pitch in one-  
octave steps. Pressing the [] button will lower  
the pitch in one-octave steps.  
for Multi mode in the 0: Play, Multi page. (p.37)  
You can press the OCTAVE [][π] buttons simul-  
taneously to recall the written (saved) settings.  
Note: If you turn the [EXT. CONTROLLER] button  
on (lit), these knobs will be switched to the  
external control function, and will be disconnected  
from the internal sound generator. The  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1]–[4] knobs will  
transmit MIDI messages (as specified by the  
external control setup) to your external MIDI  
equipment.  
OCTAVE [][π] functions  
Press the  
[]  
button  
Press the  
[π]  
button  
Keyboard  
range  
LED status  
C6 – C8  
C5 – C7  
C4 – C6  
C3 – C5  
C2 – C4  
C1 – C3  
C0 – C2  
Rapid blinking  
Slow blinking  
Lit  
π
π
π
π
π
π
π
Using the pedals for control  
Dark  
Lit  
Damper Pedal (Sustain)  
Slow blinking  
Rapid blinking  
The damper pedal is also sometimes called the  
sustain pedal. It acts like the similarly-named  
pedal on an acoustic piano; when you hold down  
the pedal, notes will continue to sustain even  
when you lift your hands off of the keyboard.  
Press the [][π]  
buttons  
simultaneously  
Keyboard  
range  
LED status  
Corresponds to  
pitch range  
Damper Switch vs. Half-Damper  
+ π  
Written value  
You can use either a standard footswitch (such as  
the Korg PS-1) or a special half-damper pedal  
(such as the Korg DS-1H) as the Damper.  
If you use a footswitch, it will work like a normal  
synthesizer sustain pedal: notes will sustain for-  
ever, as long as the pedal is held down.  
Note: With the factory settings, changing the  
program, combination, or multi set will also recall  
the OCTAVE [][π] button setting that was  
written as part of that data. This is because the  
GLOBAL 0 “OCTAVE Keys [/ π]: Use Prog/  
Combi/ Multis Octave” setting is checked. If this  
setting is not checked, changing the program etc.  
will not affect the OCTAVE [][π] setting until  
you change the octave yourself. (p.88)  
A half-damper pedal is a special type of continu-  
ous foot pedal (normal foot pedals wont work  
properly for this application). It offers more subtle  
control of sustain, which can be especially useful  
for piano sounds.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playing and Editing Programs  
The microX will automatically sense when a half-  
damper is connected to the rear-panel DAMPER  
jack. For proper operation, you will also need to  
calibrate the pedal, using the “Half Damper Cali-  
brate” command in the Global page menu. (PG  
p.77)  
External control  
You can use the REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2],  
[3], and [4] knobs to transmit MIDI messages. This  
can be used to control a KORG Legacy Collection  
software synthesizer or DAW program running on  
your computer, or to control an external MIDI  
device.  
Assignable Foot Switch  
You can assign three control changes to each knob  
and switch between them using the [SELECT] but-  
ton, giving you a total of twelve different control  
changes. These twelve assignments (four knobs x  
three sets) are one “set,” and the microX provides  
64 such sets. (p.111)  
This lets you use a simple footswitch, such as the  
Korg PS-1, as an assignable controller. The foot-  
switch can perform a wide variety of functions,  
such as:  
Sound and effect modulation  
Portamento on/ off  
Program select up or down  
Tap Tempo  
[EXT. CONTROLLER] button  
This switches the external function on/ off. If this  
is on, the button will light and the realtime control  
functions will be disabled.  
Arpeggiator on/ off  
Duplication of many front panel controls,  
including the modulation Joystick, Real-Time  
Knobs  
When this is on, you can use the [SELECT] button  
to select the MIDI messages assigned to the scene  
and use the REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2], [3],  
and [4] knobs to send messages to your external  
MIDI device.  
Functions other than the above “Sound and effect  
modulation” will always operate as specified by  
the GLOBAL 0: System, Foot page, regardless of  
the currently selected program, combination, or  
multi set.  
For more information, see “Specifying the func-  
When the external function is on, the REALTIME  
CONTROLS [1], [2], [3], and [4] knobs operate  
independently, and are not affected by the settings  
of Program, Combination, or Multi mode.  
Sending MIDI information from the  
various controllers  
When you operate a controller of the microX, the  
corresponding or specified control change will be  
transmitted via MIDI. Pitch bend messages are  
transmitted only when you operate the joystick.  
Assignable Foot Pedal  
This lets you use a continuous controller pedal,  
such as the Korg EXP-2 foot controller or Korg  
XVP-10 EXP/ VOL pedal, as an assignable control-  
ler.  
Like the Assignable Foot Switch, described above,  
the Foot Pedal can be used for many different  
functions, including:  
In Program mode, these messages are transmitted  
on the global MIDI channel.  
Master Volume  
For details on the MIDI messages transmitted  
when you operate an microX controller, and on the  
AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) and DMS  
(Dynamic Modulation Source) corresponding to  
the MIDI messages, see “MIDI transmission when  
the X50/ microX’s controllers are operated” (PG  
p.166).  
Channel Volume, Pan, or Expression  
Assignable sound modulation, as several dif-  
ferent AMS or Dmod sources  
Effects Send level control  
Duplication of many front panel controls,  
including the modulation Joystick, Real-Time  
Knobs  
Functions above will always operate as specified  
by the GLOBAL 0: System, Foot page, regardless  
of the currently selected program, combination, or  
multi set.  
For more information, see “Specifying the func-  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Simple program editing  
Simple program editing  
You can edit any of the Programs shipped with  
microX, or you can start with an initialized Pro-  
gram to create sounds from scratch.  
Amp Level: Indicates the amp level. This will  
adjust the volume of the entire program.  
Attack Time: Indicates the attack time of the  
filter EG and amp EG. This will adjust the  
speed of the attack from note-on.  
On the microX, you can use the eight sliders in the  
Performance Editor display and the realtime con-  
troller knobs and switches of the front panel to  
make simple changes to a program without hav-  
ing to enter the editing pages that contain the  
detailed editing parameters.  
Note: In order to maximize the effect of the  
Attack Time adjustment, the amp EG Start  
Level, Attack Level, Start Level Modulation,  
and Attack Time Modulation parameters are  
also adjusted.  
Decay Time: Indicates the decay time and  
slope time of the filter EG and amp EG.  
Performance Edit  
By using the eight sliders of the Performance Edi-  
IFX Balance: This simultaneously adjusts the  
“W/ D (Wet/ Dry)” balance of all insert effect.  
tor, you can make overall adjustments to the sound.  
MFX Balance: This simultaneously adjusts the  
Return 1 and 2 parameters of the master effects.  
When you move a slider, multiple program  
parameters are adjusted simultaneously, meaning  
that you can edit multiple parameters by adjusting  
a single slider.  
Note: Depending on the settings of the program  
parameters, the result may not be noticeable.  
5. If you want to save the modified sound, select  
the utility menu command “Write Program,”  
and write the program. (p.45)  
1. In Program mode (PROG 0: Play page), select  
the program that you want to edit.  
2. Press the [PAGE+] button (or [PAGE–] button)  
The edited content will be lost if you select  
another program or turn off the power before  
saving.  
to access the PROG 0: Play, Perform. Edit page.  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2],  
[3], [4], [SELECT]  
The REALTIME CONTROLS [1]–[4] knobs can be  
used to edit parameters such as the filter cutoff fre-  
quency, resonance, the amp and filter EGs, vol-  
ume, portamento time, pan, LFO speed and more.  
Three different modes - A, B, and C - allow each  
knob to control one of three separate parameters.  
3. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select the  
performance editor parameter you want to  
adjust.  
4. Use the [VALUE] dial etc. to adjust the value.  
Octave: Indicates the octave setting.  
Pitch Stretch: Simultaneously adjusts the  
transpose and tune settings of the oscillator.  
This allows you to produce a variety of tonal  
changes without losing the character of the  
original sound.  
The REALTIME CONTROLS [1]–[4] knobs can  
transmit MIDI messages (as specified by the exter-  
nal control setup) to your external MIDI equip-  
ment. If you turn the [EXT. CONTROLLER]  
button on (lit), these knobs will be switched to the  
external control function, and will be disconnected  
from the internal sound generator. For more about  
This is particularly effective for acoustic-type  
programs such as guitar, bass, or piano. Select  
various programs and try this out.  
OSC Balance: Adjusts the level balance  
between oscillators 1 and 2.  
1. Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT]  
button to switch the function of the realtime  
controllers to A-mode, B-mode, or C-mode.  
Note: For programs whose “Mode (Oscillator  
Mode)” (PROG 1: Ed–Basic, Prog Basic page)  
setting is Single, oscillator 2 will not sound.  
Only the level of oscillator 1 will change. For a  
Drums program, this performance editor will  
have no effect.  
Each time you press the button, A-mode, B-  
mode or C-mode will be selected alternately,  
and the corresponding LED will light.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Playing and Editing Programs  
Note: If CC#70–79 are assigned to REALTIME  
CONTROLS A-mode or B-mode, the sound edited  
by knobs [1]–[4] can be saved by the Program  
Write operation (p.45).  
[SELECT] button  
Adjusting the cutoff frequency of the high-pass fil-  
ter will modify the thickness of the sound from  
which the low frequency range has been filtered  
out.  
Level  
Knobs [1]–[4]  
LPF  
HPF  
2. Rotate the desired knob to control the sound,  
etc. See the explanations that follow.  
Cutoff  
frequency  
A-mode controls  
In A-mode, knobs [1]–[4] will control/ edit the fol-  
lowing functions.  
Knob [3]: EG-INTENSITY  
Adjust the filter EG intensity (the depth at which  
the filter EG is applied).  
Note: Placing the knobs in the center (12 oclock)  
position will produce the values specified by the  
program parameters.  
Rotating the knob will affect the depth of the filter  
EG. Normally, rotating the knob toward the left  
will make the filter EG apply less deeply, and  
rotating it toward the right will make the filter EG  
apply more deeply. Since the filter EG will operate  
based on the cutoff frequency of the filter, knobs  
[1] and [3] will work together to control the tonal  
changes produced by the filter.  
Knob [1]: LPF CUTOFF  
Adjust the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter.  
When you adjust the cutoff frequency of the filter,  
the brightness of the sound will change. The effect  
will depend on the settings of the program param-  
eters, but normally, rotating the knob toward the  
left will darken the sound, and rotating it toward  
the right will brighten it.  
Level  
Level  
Time  
LPF  
Frequency  
Low  
High  
Cutoff  
frequency  
Knob [4]: EG-RELEASE  
Adjust the EG release times of the filter and amp.  
This will determine the time from note-off until  
the sound disappears.  
Knob [2]: RESONANCE/HPF  
Adjust the resonance level of a low pass filter or  
the cutoff frequency of a high pass filter.  
When you adjust the knob, the release times of the  
filter EG and the amp EG will change. Normally,  
rotating the knob toward the left will shorten the  
release time, and rotating it toward the right will  
lengthen the release time.  
The content that is controlled will depend on the  
filter type specified by the program.  
By adjusting the filter resonance level, you can  
increase or decrease the resonance level to add a  
unique character to the sound.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Saving your edits  
note-on  
Level  
Attack Level  
note-off  
Break Level  
Release Level  
Time  
Sustain Level  
Note: If the display indicates “Memory  
Protected,” the program memory protect is  
turned on. Go to GLOBAL 0: System,  
Preference page, and uncheck the Memory  
Protect “Program” setting. (p.88)  
Release Time  
Slope Time  
Decay Time  
Attack Time  
Start Level  
3. Optionally, you can also select a new location,  
or change the Programs name.  
B-mode controls  
You can control parameters such as volume, porta-  
mento time, pan or filter and amp EG, pitch LFO,  
and master effect send levels etc.  
If you want to change the bank and number of  
the writing destination, use the ClickPoint to  
select the program name located at the right of  
the “To,” and use the [VALUE] dial to select the  
desired writing destination.  
The B-mode function settings are made for each  
individual program, combination, or multi set.  
Note: You cant save in banks G or g(d).  
You can specify the B-mode functions separately  
for each individual program, combination, or  
multi set.  
If you want to change the name, use the Click-  
Point to select the text button ( ) and then  
press the ClickPoint center to open the text edit  
dialog box.  
The B-mode functions of the REALTIME CON-  
TROLS [1], [2], [3], and [4] knobs can be viewed  
for Program mode in the 0: Play, Program page,  
for Combination mode in the 0: Play, Combination  
page, and for Multi mode in the 0: Play, Multi  
You can give the Program a descriptive name  
using the on-display keyboard. (p.114)  
After entering the name, press [MENU/ OK]  
button.  
The text edit window will disappear, returning  
you to the main Write dialog.  
Each knob in B-mode can also be used as a source  
for Alternate Modulation or Effect Dynamic Mod-  
ulation to control program parameters or effect  
parameters, allowing you to adjust the sound in a  
wide range of ways.  
If you want to specify the category, use the  
ClickPoint to select “Category,” and use the  
[VALUE] dial to specify the desired category.  
The category you specify here can be used  
when selecting by category with the  
[CATEGORY] button.  
C-mode control  
You can control the effect of the arpeggiator in  
realtime.  
You can select by Category in the following  
pages.  
For details on operation, see p.91.  
PROG 0: Play page  
COMBI 0: Play, Prog page “Program Select”  
COMBI 1: EdTone Adjust, Prog page  
MULTI 0: Play, Program page.  
Saving your edits  
Once youve tweaked the sound to perfection,  
4. In the Write Program dialog box, press the  
[MENU/ OK] button to write (save) the  
program.  
youll want to save your work. To save your edits:  
Be aware that if you modify the sound of a  
program or write it to a different bank or  
number, and then use a combination that uses  
the modified program, the combination will  
sound different.  
5. A message will ask you for confirmation. If you  
are sure you want to write the program, press  
the [MENU/ OK] button once again.  
The program will be written (saved).  
1. Press the [UTILITY] button to access the utility  
menu.  
2. Use the ClickPoint to select “Write Program,”  
and then press the ClickPoint center.  
The Write Program dialog box will appear.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playing and Editing Programs  
Detailed Editing with Programs  
You can create your own original sounds by edit-  
ing the factory Programs, or by initializing a Pro-  
gram (Bank E 127: Init. Program) and starting from  
scratch. You can save these Programs into any  
bank other than Bank G or g(d), which cannot be  
modified.  
These three sections determine the basic sound of  
the program.  
EG, LFO, keyboard tracking, AMS,  
Dmod, controllers  
In addition to the sections described above, the  
microX provides ways in which the sound can be  
varied according to time, key range, or various  
types of performance expression. These are con-  
trolled by modulators and controllers such as EG  
(envelope generator), LFO (Low Frequency Oscil-  
lator), keyboard tracking, AMS (Alternate Modu-  
lation Source), Dmod (Dynamic modulation) and  
the joystick. You can use these modulators and  
controllers to apply change to the basic sound of  
the program.  
Before you begin editing  
The three attributes of sound: pitch,  
tone, and volume  
Sound has three basic attributes; pitch, tone, and  
volume.  
To control these attributes, the microX provides  
“oscillator,” “filter,” and “amp (amplifier)” sec-  
tions.  
Take a look at the diagram entitled “Program  
structure and corresponding pages.” Notice that  
the audio signal flows in the order of Oscillator/  
Pitch Filter Amp. Also notice how modula-  
tors such as EG and LFO can affect these blocks.  
The “oscillator” settings vary the pitch, the “filter”  
settings modify the tone, and the “amp” settings  
modify the volume.  
As shown in figure, a program consists of OSC 1/  
2, effects, and the arpeggiator.  
The microX’s “oscillator,”“filter,and  
amp”  
OSC 1/2  
On the microX, the settings that determine the  
“pitch” are located in the PROG 1: Ed–Basic and  
PROG 2: Ed–Pitch pages. In the Ed–Basic page  
you can specify the waveform (multisample) and  
the basic pitch of the waveform. In the Ed–Pitch  
page you can specify how the pitch will follow the  
keyboard, and make other pitch-related settings.  
Each timbre consists of Oscillator/ Pitch, Filter,  
Amp, EG, and LFO blocks. You can create more  
complex programs by using two oscillators  
together in one program using the Layer feature.  
Note: The Pitch EG is shared by OSC1 and OSC2.  
“Filter” settings are made in the PROG 4: Ed–  
Filter1 and PROG 5: Ed–Filter2 pages. These set-  
tings adjust the tone.  
EFFECTS  
The output of OSC 1/ 2 is sent to the insert effect,  
the master effects, and the master EQ. The mixer  
section lets you control the routing, so you can  
specify where the sound will be sent.  
Finally, “Amp” settings are made in the PROG 6:  
EdAmp1/ 2 pages. These settings adjust the vol-  
ume, and send the sound to the outputs.  
Program structure and corresponding pages  
Program Basic : 1-1  
Controller Setup:  
7-3  
Arpeggiator :  
7-1, 2  
OSC1 LFO1 : 3-1  
OSC1 LFO2 : 3-2  
Insert Effect :  
8-1  
Master Effect 1, 2:  
9-1...3  
OSC1, 2  
Oscillator1 Basic : 1-2, 4  
Filter1(A/B) : 4-1  
Filter1 EG : 4-5  
Amp1 Level/Pan : 6-1  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
L/MONO, R  
Insert Effect:  
8-2, 3  
MasterEQ : 9-4  
Insert Effect  
Master Effect  
Individual-  
Output  
OSC1 Pitch Mod. : 2-1, 2  
Filter1 Mod. : 4-2,3  
Amp1 Mod. : 6-2  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
INDIVIDUAL 1, 2  
Filter1 LFO Mod. : 4-4  
Amp1 EG : 6-3  
OSC 1  
OSC 2  
Pitch EG : 2-5  
Filter  
Effect  
Oscillator / Pitch  
Amplifier  
1–1, 9–4, etc. indicate the microX on-screen pages and tabs.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Before you begin editing  
For the one insert effect and the two master effects,  
you can choose from 89 effect types. The master  
EQ is a stereo three-band EQ.  
Comparing (original and edited  
sounds)  
When youre in the process of editing a sound,  
pressing the [COMPARE] button will recall the  
saved version of the sound, as it was before you  
started editing. To indicate that you are listening  
to the saved version, the buttons LED will light  
up.  
ARPEGGIATOR  
A program can use one arpeggiator. You can select  
an arpeggio pattern, specify the range in which  
the arpeggio will be generated, and specify the  
range of notes (keys) and velocities that will trig-  
ger the arpeggiator.  
Pressing [COMPARE] button again returns you to  
the version you are editing, and the LED will go  
out again.  
Overview of editing pages  
If you edit while the COMPARE LED is lit, the  
button will again go dark and your previous edits  
will be lost.  
In the PROG 0: Play page you can select and play  
programs, and use the performance editor or real-  
time controllers to make simple edits to the sound.  
You can also adjust the arpeggiator settings.  
The other pages let you modify the sound in more  
detailed ways.  
• Select and play programs.  
• Use the Performance Editor for easy  
0:Play  
editing, and to do simple editing of  
arpeggio patterns.  
• Select an external control set.  
• Specify the program type as Single,  
Double, or Drum.  
• Select multisamples.  
1:EdBasic  
• Specify Mono or Poly voice assignment.  
• Select the temperament (e.g., equal  
temperament).  
2:Ed–Pitch  
3:EdLFOs  
• Pitch settings. Pitch EG settings.  
Type and speed settings etc. for the two  
LFOs provided for each oscillator. (Make  
settings in the pitch, filter, and amp  
pages to specify the depth of the LFO  
settings you make here.)  
4:EdFilter1  
5:EdFilter2  
Filter (tone) settings. Filter EG settings.  
• Settings related to Amp 1/2 (volume),  
including amp EQ and pan (stereo  
position).  
6:EdAmp1/2  
7:EdArp/Ctrls  
Arpeggiator settings. (Shared with 0:  
Play parameters.You may edit either.)  
Controller settings.  
• Select the BUS and master effect send  
level for the oscillator output.  
Insert Effect routing, selection and  
settings.  
8:EdInsertFX  
9:EdMasterFX  
• Master Effect selection and settings.  
Master EQ settings.  
For details on how to access each mode, page, and  
the utility commands, and how to edit values, see  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playing and Editing Programs  
EGs will not re-trigger, so that you can move from  
note to note in a true legato fashion. If the previ-  
ous note is released before the next note is played,  
the note will trigger normally.  
Basic oscillator settings  
Program type setting (single, dou-  
ble, drum kit)  
Try switching between Poly and Mono, and listen  
to the results.  
Here you can specify the type of program  
(whether to use one oscillator, two oscillators, or a  
drum kit). Use the PROG 1: Ed–Basic, Prog Basic  
“Oscillator Mode” to specify the program type.  
Working with Multisamples  
What is a multisample?  
A sample is a digital recording of a particular  
instrument or waveform (or other natural or artifi-  
cially processed sound) recorded at a specific  
pitch. A multisample is a collection of similarly  
voiced samples, used to create the same type of  
sound - piano, bass, guitar, strings, organ - across  
the entire keyboard, as the basis of a program. The  
oscillators of single and double programs use mul-  
tisamples. There are 624 multisamples available in  
this instrument.  
Single Programs have one oscillator, and Double  
Programs have two oscillators. Each oscillator  
includes a complete synthesis voice, with velocity-  
switched Multisamples, dual filters, EGs, LFOs,  
and so on.  
Drums mode is a special variation of Single mode,  
and uses a Drum Kit (as created in Global mode)  
instead of Multisamples.  
You can assign up to two multisamples to each  
oscillator and switch between them by velocity.  
This is called “velocity multisample switching.”  
Polyphony  
Multisamples and Drum Kits  
Multisamples and Drum Kits allow you to play  
samples in different ways.  
Polyphony is the number of notes that can be  
played simultaneously, such as in a chord. The  
polyphony depends on the program type.  
Multisamples lay out one or more samples  
across the keyboard. For instance, a very simple  
guitar Multisample might have six samples–  
one for each string.  
Program type  
Single  
Polyphony  
62  
31  
62  
Double  
Drums  
As the name suggests, Drum Kits are optimized  
for playing drum samples.  
Selecting Multisamples  
Polyphonic/monophonic playing  
If you specify a High and Low multisample for an  
oscillator, either the High or the Low multisample  
will sound depending on the velocity of the note  
(i.e., the strength at which you play the keyboard).  
This function is called velocity multisample  
switching.  
The Voice Assign Mode selects whether the Pro-  
gram will play polyphonically (Poly) or mono-  
phonically (Mono).  
Note: To make it easier for you to hear the result,  
set the program type to “Oscillator Mode” Single.  
1. Access the PROG 1: Ed–Basic, OSC1 page.  
When this is set to Poly, you can play both chords  
and melody lines. When this is set to Mono, only  
one note will sound even if you play a chord.  
Normally youll set this to Poly, but Mono is use-  
ful when playing sounds such as synth basses,  
synth leads, and other solo instruments. Another  
important aspect of monophonic playing is Legato  
triggering. When Legato is on (the box is checked),  
if a new note on the keyboard is played before the  
previous note is released, the filter and amplifier  
2. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to highlight  
“High Multisample.”  
Use the [VALUE] dial to make your selection.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Basic oscillator settings  
Alternatively, you can select a multisample by  
category.  
It will be convenient to use the Utility “Copy  
Oscillator” to make the oscillator settings  
match each other.  
With “High Multisample” highlighted, press  
the [CATEGORY] button to access the category  
2. Specify the playback pitch for OSC1 and OSC2.  
The playback pitch can be set independently.  
By using the same multisample with slightly  
different “Tune” settings, you can “detune” the  
oscillators to produce a richer sound. Generally  
speaking, people hear flat notes as sounding  
“sour” or out of tune more easily than they do  
sharp notes. So when detuning two oscillators,  
it may sound more musical to tune one  
oscillator up in pitch, and leave the other  
oscillator close to or just slightly below normal  
pitch.  
Use the [PAGE+][PAGE–] buttons to select a  
category.  
Then use the [VALUE] dial to select a  
multisample.  
Press the [MENU/ OK] button to finalize your  
selection.  
Using velocity to switch between oscil-  
lator 1 and 2  
3. Specify the basic pitch of the oscillator. This is  
set by the “Octave” parameter.  
4. In the same way, select a different multisample  
for “Low Multisample.”  
You have now assigned the “High” and “Low”  
multisamples. Next well set the velocity range.  
5. Specify a velocity value for “Velocity SW  
Here you can specify the range of velocities that  
will sound oscillators 1 and 2.  
LH.”  
Notes played on the keyboard at a velocity less  
than the value you specify will sound the Low  
multisample; velocities at or above this velocity  
value will sound the High multisample.  
In the example shown above, the velocity ranges  
are as follows.  
OSC1 will sound for all velocity values.  
OSC2 will sound only for strongly played notes  
(64 and above).  
For example if you set “Velocity SW LH” to  
100, playing the keyboard softly will sound the  
“Low” multisample, and playing strongly will  
sound the “High” multisample.  
You can use Velocity Multisample Switching in  
addition to this (“High Multisample, Low  
Multisample”). For this example, set “OSC1” in  
Velocity SW LH” to 32 and “OSC2” to 96.  
The settings are shown as vertical lines in the  
velocity zone display.  
6. Adjust the “Level” for High and Low  
multisamples to set their volume balance.  
Note: If you do not wish to use this function, set  
the Velocity SW L Hvalue to 001. Only the  
High multisample will sound.  
In this example, the multisamples will sound  
over four levels.  
Velocity values 001–031:  
sound only the OSC1 Low multisample.  
Reverse check box  
Reverse lets you play the selected multisample  
backwards, without looping. This can produce  
interesting results for sound effects or other  
unusual timbres. Normally you will not check  
this.  
Velocity values 032–063:  
sound only the OSC1 High multisample.  
Velocity values 064–095:  
sound the OSC1 High multisample and the  
OSC2 Low multisample.  
Velocity values 096–127:  
sound the OSC1 High multisample and the  
OSC2 High multisample.  
Using oscillators 1 and 2 to create a  
detuned sound  
You can use a double program (i.e., a program  
whose “Oscillator Mode” is Double) to create a  
detuned sound as follows.  
1. Make the same multisample and EG settings,  
etc. for OSC1 and OSC2.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playing and Editing Programs  
Copying settings between OSC1 &  
OSC2  
Many of the Program parameters can be set differ-  
ently for OSC1 and OSC2.  
5. Specify the basic pitch of the oscillator. For a  
These include all of the parameters on:  
drum kit, set “Octave” to +0 [8'].  
All of the tabs on the Ed–Pitch page, except for  
the Pitch EG  
All of the tabs on the Ed–Filter page  
All of the tabs on the Ed–Amp page  
All of the tabs on the Ed–LFOs page  
Using LFOs and Envelopes (EGs)  
You can use the utility menus Copy Oscillator  
command to copy these parameters from one  
Oscillator to another. You can even copy parame-  
ters from an Oscillator in a different Program.  
Using LFOs  
Each Oscillator has two LFOs: LFO1 and LFO2.  
You can use these LFOs to modulate many differ-  
ent Program parameters, including:  
This command is useful when you want to set  
both Oscillators to the same settings, or when you  
want to duplicate settings youve used before.  
Pitch (vibrato): PROG 2: Ed–Pitch, OSC1 LFO  
“Intensity,” and the same parameter of the  
OSC2 LFO  
Filter (wah effect): PROG 4: EdFilter1, LFO  
Mod. “Intensity to A” and “to B,” and the same  
parameters for PROG 5: Ed–Filter2  
Assigning a drum kit  
What is a drum kit?  
Volume (auto-tremolo): PROG 6: Ed–Amp1/ 2,  
Mod, LFO1 Mod. “Intensity,” and the same  
parameters for LFO2 Mod.  
If you want to use a drum kit in a program, set the  
“Oscillator Mode” to Drums. Then choose one of  
the 40 user drum kits or nine GM-compatible  
drum kits for the program to use.  
In addition to the uses described above, you can  
use an LFO as a source for Alternate Modulation  
and Effect Dynamic Modulation to modulate a  
wide range of parameters. By assigning an LFO to  
“Pan AMS” (PROG 6: Ed–Amp1/ 2, Level/ Pan)  
you can create an auto-pan effect.  
A drum program uses a “drum kit” for its oscilla-  
tor. A drum kit consists of multiple drum instru-  
ment samples placed across the keyboard. There  
are 929 drum instrument samples. (p.48 “Multi-  
In Global mode you can create or edit a drum kit  
itself. You can assign up to two drum samples  
(High and Low) to each note of the keyboard, and  
switch between these drum samples by velocity.  
You can also specify the effects and the routing to  
the audio output jacks. (p.108 “Editing Drum  
Basic LFO settings  
Note: Depending on the program youve selected,  
you may be unable to hear the result of the  
following edits. If so, increase the value of one of  
the “Intensity” parameters listed above so that  
you can hear the result.  
For example in order to use OSC1 LFO1 to modu-  
late filter 1, you should increase the PROG 4: Ed–  
Filter1, LFO Mod. LFO1 “Intensity to A” or “Inten-  
sity to Bvalue.  
Selecting a drum kit  
1. Access the PROG 1: Ed–Basic, Prog Basic page.  
2. Set “Oscillator Mode” to Drums.  
1. Access the PROG 3: Ed–LFOs, OSC1 LFO page.  
3. Access the PROG 1: Ed–Basic, OSC1 page.  
2. Select the “Waveform” parameter.  
4. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to highlight  
3. Use the [VALUE] dial etc. to select the desired  
“Drum Kit.”  
LFO waveform.  
Use the [VALUE] dial to select a drum kit.  
The display shows a graphic of the waveform.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Alternate Modulation  
There are a number of waveforms to choose  
from. Each are suited to different applications:  
Each program includes three EGs, one for Pitch,  
one for the Filter, and one for the Amp. These pro-  
duce time-varying changes in pitch, tone, and vol-  
ume respectively. They can also be used to  
modulate a number of other Program parameters  
via AMS.  
Triangle and Sine are the classic LFO shapes  
for vibrato, tremolo, panning, and filter wah  
effects.  
Square is useful for gated filter and amp  
effects, and creates a police siren effect when  
modulating pitch.  
note-on Attack Level  
note-off  
Break Level  
Level  
The Guitar waveform is designed especially for  
guitar vibrato, since it bends only upwards  
from the base value.  
Release Level  
Time  
Sustain Level  
Saw and Exponential Saw Down are good for  
rhythmic filter and amp effects.  
Release Time  
Decay Time  
Attack Time  
Slope Time  
Start Level  
Random 1 (S/H) creates the classic sample-and-  
hold effect, which is great for modulating a  
resonant filter.  
4. After looking at the different waveforms, select  
Using Alternate Modulation  
Triangle.  
5. Use the “Frequency” parameter to set the speed  
AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) refers to any  
of the assignable modulation sources in microX,  
including:  
of the LFO.  
6. Use the “Fade” and “Dly” (Delay) settings to  
control the way the LFO sounds at the  
beginning of the note.  
Built-in physical controllers, such as the Joy-  
stick, and Real-Time Knobs  
For more information on LFOs, see “PROG 3: Ed–  
LFOs” (PG p.14).  
Incoming MIDI controllers  
Modulators such as the Filter, Pitch, and Amp  
EGs, or the LFOs  
All of these parameters control the way that the  
LFO itself works. In order for the LFO to actually  
affect the sound, you can use the dedicated LFO  
routings on the Filter, Pitch, and Amp pages, or  
use the LFOs as AMS sources for a wide variety of  
parameters.  
Intensity is a parameter that sets the degree  
(speed, depth, amount etc.) to which AMS will  
control the modulation.  
A number of frequently-used modulation rout-  
ings, such as using the joystick to vary the pitch,  
are provided as additional, dedicated routings,  
separate from AMS.  
Frequency Modulation  
AMS can be used to vary the LFO speed. This lets  
you change the LFO speed by operating a control-  
ler, or by the EG or Keyboard Track settings. (PG  
p.14)  
Note that not all AMS sources may be available for  
some modulation destinations.  
For details on alternate modulation and AMS, see  
“Alternate Modulation Source (AMS)” (PG  
p.151).  
MIDI/Tempo Sync.  
If “MIDI/ Tempo Sync” is checked, the “Fre-  
quency” setting will be ignored, and the LFO will  
synchronize to the system tempo, as set by the  
TEMPO knob or external MIDI clocks.  
Suggestions on using AMS  
When making settings for alternate modulation,  
think of the effect that you wish to produce, what  
type of modulation will be necessary to produce  
that effect, and what parameter of the oscillator,  
filter, or amplifier needs to be controlled.  
This lets you produce vibrato, wah, auto-pan, or  
tremolo effects that lock to arpeggiator, or external  
MIDI sequencers.  
Next, select a source (AMS) and set the Intensity.  
If you proceed logically in this way, you will  
achieve the desired effect.  
For example, if you want to control a guitar sound  
so that it approaches feedback when you move the  
joystick, you might set up the joystick to modulate  
the filter frequency and resonance.  
EGs (Envelope Generators)  
An envelope creates a modulation signal by mov-  
ing from one level to another over a specified time,  
and then moving to another level over another  
period of time, and so on.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playing and Editing Programs  
pitch will change over a longer time. With a value  
of 000, there will be no portamento.  
Controlling Pitch  
Here you can specify how the pitch of the multi-  
sample selected for the oscillator will change.  
Pitch EG and LFO settings allow the pitch to var-  
ied over time.  
Creating Vibrato  
You can use an LFO to create vibrato.  
LFO 1/2 Intensity sets the depth to which the  
selected LFO will affect the pitch. With a setting of  
+12.00, vibrato will produce a maximum of ±1  
octave of pitch change.  
Note: To specify the basic pitch of the multisample,  
use the “Octave” parameter in the PROG 1: Ed–  
Basic, OSC1 or OSC2 page.  
JS+Y Int” specifies the amount of vibrato that the  
LFO will produce when the joystick is pushed  
away from yourself.  
Varying the pitch according to key-  
board position (Pitch Slope)  
On keyboard instruments such as piano or organ,  
the pitch will rise as you play toward the right  
side of the keyboard, and fall as you play toward  
the left.  
“AMS Intensity” specifies the depth of the vibrato  
effect created by LFO when you operate an AMS  
(Alternate Modulation Source). For example, sup-  
pose you set “LFO1 AMS” to KnobM1 [+] (Knob  
Mod1: CC#17), and raise the “AMS Intensity.” If  
Knob B Assign “Knob 1-B” is set to Knob Mod.1  
(CC#17), vibrato will be applied when you turn  
the microX’s knob [1] or when CC#17 is received.  
You can use the “Pitch Slope” setting to specify  
how this will occur.  
With positive (+) settings, the pitch will rise as you  
play toward the right side of the keyboard. With  
negative (–) settings, the pitch will fall as you play  
toward the right side of the keyboard.  
Normally you will leave this set to +1.0.  
Modulating the pitch  
Pitch EG  
When the Intensity value is set to +12.00, the pitch  
EG specified in the Pitch EG page will produce a  
maximum of ±1 octave of pitch change.  
To realistically simulate the slight change in pitch  
that occurs when a string is plucked or at the  
attack of a brass or vocal sound, you can use the  
EG to create a subtle change in pitch at the attack.  
Pitch bend  
The JS (+X) and JS(–X) settings specify the  
amount of pitch change (in semitones) that will  
occur when MIDI pitch bend messages are  
received or when the joystick is moved to left or  
right. A setting of +12 allows the pitch to be con-  
trolled a maximum of one octave upward; a set-  
ting of –12 allows the pitch to be controlled a  
maximum of one octave downward.  
“Ribbon (#16)” specifies the amount of pitch  
change (in units of a semitone) that will occur  
when CC#16 is received (or when you operate the  
ribbon controller of a connected TRITON Extreme  
or similar device).  
Portamento  
Portamento makes the pitch change smoothly  
when you play the next note before releasing the  
previous note.  
The “Time” parameter controls how long it take  
the pitch to change. As this value is increased, the  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Using Filters  
High pass filter  
Using Filters  
This type of filter passes the high frequency range  
and cuts the low frequency range. Use this when  
you wish to make the sound thinner. However if  
the cutoff frequency (Frequency) is raised exces-  
sively high, the volume will become very low.  
The filters allows you to diminish or emphasize  
specified frequency areas of the sound.  
The tone of the sound will depend significantly  
on the filter settings.  
High Pass  
Level  
microX provides Filter1 for OSC1 and Filter2 for  
OSC2. For each of these filters, you can select from  
two types (Low Pass Resonance or Low Pass &  
High Pass). Filter2 can be used if “Mode (Oscilla-  
tor Mode)” is set to Double.  
12dB/oct  
Frequency  
Level  
Resonance  
When “Resonance” is set to a higher value, the  
overtones in the region of the cutoff frequency will  
be boosted as shown in the diagram below, giving  
a distinctive character to the sound.  
Overtones included  
in the original multi-  
sample  
Frequency (pitch)  
When resonance is applied  
Filte r  
Low Pass  
Level  
Filter characteristics  
Level  
This area of overtones  
will be diminished  
Low resonance  
value  
High resonance  
value  
Overtones after  
passing through  
the filter  
When this is set to 0, there is no emphasis, and fre-  
quencies beyond the cutoff will simply diminish  
smoothly.  
Frequency (pitch)  
At medium settings, the resonance will alter the  
timbre of the filter, making it sound more nasal, or  
more extreme. At very high settings, the resonance  
can be heard as a separate, whistling pitch.  
Filter Types  
This selects the parts of the sound which will be  
affected by the filter, as described below.  
To make the resonance track the keyboard pitch,  
see “4–2a: Keyboard Track” (PG p.17).  
Low pass filter  
This is the most common type of filter, which  
passes the low frequency range and cuts the high  
frequency range. When the overtones of the high  
range are cut, a bright sound will become darker  
(more mellow).  
Selecting a filter to modify the tone  
Heres how to select a filter type and adjust the  
“Frequency” (cutoff frequency) and “Resonance”  
(resonance level).  
24 dB/ oct and 12 dB/ oct see the steepness of the  
cut. 24 dB/oct means that the gain will decrease 24  
dB in one octave (i.e., as the frequency doubles). A  
12 dB/oct filter would decrease the gain 12 dB in  
one octave. The 24 dB/ oct filter produces a steeper  
cut.  
1. Use “Type” to select a filter type.  
Low Pass Resonance: This is a 24 dB/ octave  
low pass filter with resonance.  
Low Pass & High Pass: This is a 12 dB/ octave  
low pass filter and a 12 dB/ octave high pass  
filter connected in series.  
Low Pass  
Level  
2. If youve selected Low Pass Resonance as the  
12dB/oct  
24dB/oct  
filter type, you can set the parameters for Filter  
A.  
“Frequency” specifies the cutoff frequency.  
Overtones above the specified cutoff frequency  
will be diminished, making the tone more  
mellow (darker).  
Frequency  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playing and Editing Programs  
“Resonance” specifies the resonance level. This  
boosts the overtones in the region of the  
specified “Frequency,” giving the sound a  
distinctive character.  
Int. to A” and “Int. to B” adjust the effect that  
keyboard tracking will have on filters A and B.  
For more details, see “4–2a: Keyboard Track”  
(PG p.17).  
Filter EG  
The Filter EG is a multi-stage envelope, which you  
can use to modulate the filter (naturally!) as well  
as other Program parameters. The EG itself is set  
up on the Filter page; the way that it affects the fil-  
ters is controlled by the parameters described  
below, on the Filter Mod page:  
If youve selected Low Pass & High Pass as the  
filter type, you can use the Filter A parameters  
to adjust the low pass filter and the Filter B  
parameters to adjust the high pass filter.  
The “Int. to A” and “Int. to B” settings control the  
basic amount of EG modulation for filter frequen-  
cies A and B, respectively, before other modula-  
tion.  
Overtones above the Filter A “Frequency” will  
be diminished, making the sound more mellow  
(darker).  
The “Vel to A” and “Vel to B” settings let you use  
velocity to scale the amount of EG modulation.  
Overtones below the Filter B “Frequency” will  
be diminished, decreasing the low-range and  
making the sound thinner.  
The “AMS” setting selects a AMS modulation  
source to scale the amount of the Filter EG applied  
to Filters A and B. The two filters share a single  
AMS source, with separate intensity settings.  
Modulating the filters  
You can modulate the filter cutoff frequency using  
the Filter EG, the LFOs, keyboard tracking, and  
other built-in and MIDI controllers. This is a great  
way to add a rich variety of tonal change to the  
sound.  
Keyboard Track  
LFO modulation  
Most acoustic instruments get brighter as you play  
higher pitches. At its most basic, keyboard track-  
ing re-creates this effect by increasing the cutoff  
frequency of a lowpass filter as you play higher on  
the keyboard. Usually, some amount of key track-  
ing is necessary in order to make the timbre con-  
sistent across the entire range.  
You can modulate the filter via LFO1 and LFO2.  
Among other applications, LFO modulation of the  
filter can produce the classic “auto-wah” effect.  
The Ed–Filter1, LFO Mod (or Ed–Filter2) page lets  
you set up the following parameters separately for  
each LFO:  
“Intensity to A” and “Intensity to B” specify how  
When Ramp “Low” is set to a positive (+)  
value, the cutoff frequency will rise as you play  
lower on the keyboard, making the sound  
brighter. When set to a negative (–) value, the  
cutoff frequency will fall as you play lower on  
the keyboard, making the sound darker.  
much the LFO changes the tone.  
JS-Y Int. to A” and “JS-Y Int. to B” specify the  
depth of the wah effect created by the LFO when  
you move the joystick toward yourself or when  
CC#2 is received.  
The “AMS” setting selects a AMS modulation  
source to scale the amount of the LFO applied to  
Filters A and B. The two filters share a single AMS  
source, with separate intensity settings.  
When Ramp “High” is set to a positive (+)  
value, the cutoff frequency will rise as you play  
higher on the keyboard, making the sound  
brighter. When set to a negative (–) value, the  
cutoff frequency will fall as you play higher on  
the keyboard, making the sound darker.  
For example if you set Knob B Assign “Knob 1-B”  
to Knob Mod. 1 (CC#17), and set “AMS” to Knob  
M1#17, you can turn the REALTIME CONTROLS  
B-mode knob [1] to apply an auto wah effect.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Using the Amp section  
AMS modulation  
Applying modulation to the amp  
In addition to the EG, LFOs, and Key Track, you  
can use two AMS sources to modulate the filters.  
For instance, you could use the joystick to change  
the brightness.  
Keyboard Track  
This lets you vary the volume relative to the note  
you play.  
Using the Amp section  
Velocity (Amp Modulation)  
The Amp section includes controls for volume and  
pan. You can control the volume using the Amp  
EG, LFO 1/ 2, Keyboard Track, and velocity, along  
with other AMS sources.  
Velocity Intensity is used by most programs to  
decrease the volume of softly played notes and  
increase the volume of strongly played notes.  
Normally you will set Amp Modulation to posi-  
tive (+) values. As this setting is increased, there  
will be greater volume difference between softly  
played and strongly played notes.  
Each Oscillator has its own Amp section: Amp1  
for OSC1, and Amp2 for OSC2.  
Different sounds have characteristic shapes to  
their volume levels.  
LFO1/2 Mod.  
Specifies how the LFOs will produce cyclic  
changes in volume (tremolo effect).  
For example, the volume of a piano note begins at  
a high volume the instant you play the note, and  
then decreases gradually.  
The volume will be affected by the LFO(s) for  
which you set an LFO1 Mod Intensity, LFO2 Mod  
Intensity value.  
The volume of an organ note, on the other hand,  
remains constant as long as you continue pressing  
the key.  
The volume of a note on a violin or wind instru-  
ment can be varied during the note by the musi-  
cian (i.e., by regulating the amount of pressure on  
the bow or the force of the breath).  
Intensity (AMS Intensity) adjusts the depth by  
which the tremolo effect produced by the LFO will  
be affected when you assign an AMS (LFO1 AMS,  
LFO2 AMS).  
Volume  
Volume  
Piano  
Organ  
For example if you set “AMS” (LFO1 or LFO2) to  
JS-Y #02, you can move the joystick toward your-  
self or receive CC#2 to apply a tremolo effect.  
Volume remains  
constant until note  
is released  
Volume decays  
gradually  
Amp EG (Amp Envelope Generator)  
Time  
Time  
The Amp EG lets you control how the volume  
changes over the course of a note.  
Setting the basic amp level  
The basic volume level is set by the “Amp Level”  
parameter.  
You can then alter this using the modulation  
sources below:  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Playing and Editing Programs  
Every instrument has its own characteristic vol-  
ume envelope. This is part of what gives each  
instrument its identifiable character.  
Conversely, by changing the volume contour–for  
instance, applying a string-like Amp EG curve to  
an organ multisample– you can produce interest-  
ing and unusual sounds.  
If this is checked, the Program can use a different  
pan position for each drum sound, as specified by  
the Drum Kit. If this is unchecked, all drum  
sounds will use the Programs pan position. The  
factory presets and GM drum kits use individual  
pan positions for the different drums, so normally  
it’s best to leave this checked.  
Piano  
Organ  
Effects  
Strings  
Effects are covered in their own section of the  
manuals, so we wont go into too much detail  
Insert Effect  
Adjusting the pan (stereo position)  
You can make insert effect settings in the PROG 8:  
EdInsertFX page.  
The Insert Effect can be assigned to either an indi-  
vidual oscillator or the entire Program. You can  
use any type of effects, from distortions and com-  
pressors to choruses and reverbs.  
The main “Pan” parameter determines the place-  
ment of the sound in the stereo field after the sig-  
nal has passed through the oscillator, filter, and  
amp.  
The Insert Effect can be routed to the main out-  
puts, or to any of the individual outputs. (p.84)  
Normally youll set this to C064, so that the sound  
is centered equally between the left and right  
speakers.  
To create a stereo effect when “Oscillator Mode” is  
set to Double, set the Amp1 “Pan” to L001, and  
the Amp2 “Pan” R127. This will make OSC1 go to  
the left speaker, and OSC2 go to the right speaker.  
Master Effects  
You can make master effect settings in the PROG  
9: EdMasterFX page.  
There are two Master Effects, which are accessed  
through Sends 1 and 2. These are best-suited to  
effects such as reverbs and delays, but you can use  
them with any type of effect. (p.85)  
With a setting of Random, the pan will change  
randomly each time you play a note on microX,  
producing an interesting effect.  
Master EQ  
You can make master EQ settings in the PROG 9:  
EdMasterFX page.  
Pan AMS and Intensity  
“Intensity” specifies the depth of the pan modula-  
tion from the selected AMS source.  
The master EQ is located immediately before the  
(MAIN OUTPUT) L/ MONO and R outputs. Use it  
to adjust the overall tone. (p.85)  
If you set AMS to Note Number, the pan will  
change according to the keyboard position of each  
note played.  
With a setting of LFO1 or 2, the sound will sweep  
from side to side, creating an auto-pan effect.  
Pan - Use DKit Setting  
Use DKit Setting applies when “Oscillator Mode”  
is set to Drums.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playing and Editing Combinations  
controller filtering, and so on.  
Whats a Combination?  
As with Programs, each Combi has 1 Insert Effect,  
2 Master Effects, and a Master EQ, for shaping and  
transforming the sounds of the individual Tim-  
bres. Finally, Combis can use 2 Arpeggio patterns  
modules at once.  
Combinations, or “Combis” for short, let you split  
and layer up to 8 Programs at once.  
A Combi is made up of 8 Timbres. Each Timbre  
has a Program, along with parameters for key and  
velocity zones, mixer settings, MIDI channel and  
Playing combinations  
Selecting combinations from the  
front panel  
Selecting combinations  
There are several different ways to select Combi-  
1. Press a COMBINATION [A]–[C] button. (The  
nations. Each one is convenient in a different way:  
button will light.)  
Selecting combinations from the front panel:  
Using “Combi Select” to select a program  
You will enter Combination mode, and the  
bank you specified will be selected. Notice that  
the upper line of the display indicates “COMBI  
0: Play” (mode name, page number and name).  
The bank number you specified is shown below  
“COMBI 0: Play.”  
·
·
Turn the [VALUE] dial.  
Press the center of the ClickPoint to high-  
light the field, then use [π][] to select a  
program, and press the center to finalize  
your selection.  
Page number and name  
Category number  
Parameter name  
Tempo  
Mode name  
·
Use the COMBINATION [A]–[C] buttons to  
select a combination bank.  
Tab name  
and name  
Bank  
number  
Combi  
Selecting combinations by program category  
Select (com-  
bination  
numberand  
name)  
You can select programs by categories such as  
piano or drums. (p.38)  
Tab  
Control assign list  
Selecting combinations by using a foot-  
switch:  
2. Make sure that “Combi Select” (combination  
You can change combinations even while both  
hands are busy playing on the keyboard -  
convenient for live applications  
number and name) is selected.  
If this is not selected, use the ClickPoint [π][]  
to highlight the “Combi Select” indication.  
Selecting combinations by receiving MIDI  
program changes:  
3. Use the [VALUE] dial etc. to select the  
combination you want to play.  
You can switch combinations from an external  
MIDI sequencer or an external MIDI controller.  
1, 4  
See below for details.  
5
2
3
You can use either of the following methods to  
select a program.  
Turn the [VALUE] dial.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playing and Editing Combinations  
Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight  
the field, then use [π][] to select a program,  
and press the center to finalize your selection.  
Using a footswitch to select Combi-  
nations  
4. Press a COMBINATION [A]–[C] button to  
You can assign a footswitch to step through Com-  
binations one by one, either going up (0, 1, 2, 3,  
etc.) or going down (3, 2, 1 etc.).  
switch banks.  
When you select a different Bank, the buttons  
LED will light, and the selected bank will  
appear on the left side of the display.  
This lets you change Combinations without using  
your hands–great for quick Combination changes  
in live performance situations.  
For example, to select bank B, press the  
COMBINATION [B] button. The [B] button will  
light, and the name Bank B will appear in the  
left of the display.  
For details on how to do this, refer to “Using a  
Using MIDI program changes to  
select combinations  
You can select combinations in the COMBI 0: Play  
page or switch the programs of timbres by send-  
ing MIDI program change messages from your  
external MIDI device (DAW software or other  
sequencer, or MIDI controller) to the microX.  
Auditioning the sound  
5. Play a note on the keyboard to hear the sound  
you selected.  
Note: You cant use the [AUDITION] button to  
play a riff (phrase) in Combination mode.  
Overview: Combination Banks  
When shipped from the factory, it is loaded with  
384 Combinations. You can also save any combi-  
nations that you create.  
If youve installed the included “microX Plug-In  
Editor” into your DAW program as a plug-in, you  
can easily select microX programs or combinations  
from a list within your DAW software. For more  
details, see “Editor/ Plug-In Editor Manual”  
(PDF).  
Combinations are organized into three banks as  
shown in the following table.  
Combination banks  
Prog.  
No.  
Switching combinations via MIDI  
The combination will change when the microX  
receives a program change on a channel that  
matches the global MIDI channel.  
Bank  
Explanation  
With the factory settings,  
these banks contain a wide  
variety of preloaded  
However, this is affected by the GLOBAL 1: MIDI  
“Combi (Combination Change)” setting. This set-  
ting must be checked. If this setting is unchecked,  
the combination will not change; instead, the pro-  
gram will change for the timbre of the matching  
channel.  
combinations that use  
multiple programs, effects,  
and arpeggio patterns.  
for  
preloaded  
000…  
127  
A, B, C  
combination 128 programs can be written  
or rewritten to each bank AC  
(for a total of 384).You cant  
write (save) data in these  
banks.  
With the factory settings, the global MIDI channel  
is set to channel 1. If you want to change this set-  
Selecting by Category  
You can select Combinations from within a cate-  
gory, such as keyboard, synthesizer, bass, and  
drums.  
Switching the program of a timbre via  
MIDI  
The MIDI channel of a timbre is specified by the  
COMBI 2: EdTrack Param, MIDI “MIDI Chan-  
nel” setting. When a program change message on  
a MIDI channel that matched the timbres channel  
is received, the program will change for timbres  
whose “Status” is INT. However, program  
changes for timbres are affected by the COMBI 3:  
EdMIDI Filter1, -1 page “Program Change” set-  
ting.  
When shipped from the factory, the preloaded  
Combinations are organized into 16 categories.  
For details on how to do this, refer to “Using  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using Controllers  
The “Status” setting is located in the COMBI 2:  
EdTrack Param, MIDI page, and the “Program  
Change” setting is located in the COMBI 3: Ed–  
MIDI Filter1, -1 page.  
Using Controllers  
Just as in Program mode, you can use controllers  
such as the joystick, OCTAVE [][π] buttons, and  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1]–[4] to add a broad  
range of expression to your playing in Combina-  
tion mode.  
The result of receiving a program change on the  
global MIDI channel will depend on the GLOBAL  
1: MIDI “Combi (Combination Change)” setting.  
These controls let you modify the tone, pitch, vol-  
ume, effects, etc. in realtime while you play.  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2], [3], and [4] will  
also function as external controls.  
Sending MIDI information from the  
various controllers  
When you select a combination on microX, a MIDI  
program change for the selected combination  
number will be transmitted on the global MIDI  
channel. At the same time, bank select, program  
change, and volume (CC#7) messages will be  
transmitted on the MIDI channel specified for  
each timbre that is set to “Status” of EXT or EX2.  
However, these messages will not be transmitted  
for timbres that are set to the same MIDI channel  
as the global MIDI channel. In this case, EX2 tim-  
bres will show the “Program Select” Bank as “–”,  
and will transmit the bank number that was speci-  
fied in “Bank (EX2) MSB”and “Bank (EX2) LSB”  
(2–1a).  
MIDI messages transmitted when you operate  
microX are transmitted on the global MIDI chan-  
nel. At the same time, timbres whose “Status” is  
EXT or EX2 will transmit the same messages on  
their own MIDI channel.  
For details on the MIDI messages transmitted  
when you operate an microX controller, and on the  
AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) and DMS  
(Dynamic Modulation Source) corresponding to  
the MIDI messages, see “MIDI transmission when  
the X50/ microX’s controllers are operated” (PG  
p.166).  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playing and Editing Combinations  
Simple combination editing  
You can edit any of the Combinations shipped  
with microX, or you can start with an initialized  
Program to create sounds from scratch.  
1. Press the [UTILITY] button to access the utility  
menu.  
On the microX, you can use the edit of COMBI 0:  
Play page and the realtime controller knobs and  
switches of the front panel to make simple  
changes to a program without having to enter the  
editing pages that contain the detailed editing  
parameters.  
2. Use the ClickPoint [π][] to choose “Solo  
Selected Timbre,” and press the ClickPoint  
center.  
Now you will hear only the program sound of  
the currently selected timbre. The lower part of  
the display will indicate [Solo].  
Changing the programs  
within the Combination  
Changing the Program assigned to each timbre (1–  
8) is a quick way to dramatically alter the sound of  
the Combination.  
3. To cancel this setting, choose “Solo Selected  
Timbre” once again and press the ClickPoint  
center.  
Note: You can make the following settings from  
either the COMBI 0: Play page or the 1: Ed–Tone  
Adjust page.  
Receiving MIDI program changes to  
switch timbre programs  
Selecting programs from the front  
panel and LCD  
To change the Program assigned to a Timbre:  
Note: MIDI program changes only work for  
Timbres whose Status is set to INT.  
1. Access the COMBI 0: Play, Prog page.  
This page shows information about the  
programs assigned to Timbres 1–8.  
Adjusting a timbres pan and  
volume  
Adjusting the pan (stereo position)  
Heres how to adjust the pan of each timbre.  
2. Use the ClickPoint to highlight “Program  
Select,” and use the [VALUE] dial etc. to select a  
program.  
1. Access the COMBI 0: Play, Mixer page.  
You can use either of the following methods to  
select a program.  
This page shows the pan and volume settings  
for the programs assigned to timbres 1–8.  
Turn the [VALUE] dial.  
Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight  
the field, then use [π][] to select a program,  
and press the center to finalize your selection.  
2. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to highlight  
the “Pan” of the timbre whose pan setting you  
want to adjust, and use the [VALUE] dial etc. to  
adjust the setting.  
Listening to the program sound of just  
one timbre  
Heres how you can listen to the sound of a single  
timbre by itself.  
A setting of C064 is center, L001 is far left, and  
R127 is far right. With a setting of RND, the  
stereo location will change randomly between  
left and right each time a note is played.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2], [3], [4], [SELECT]  
Adjusting the volume  
Heres how to adjust the volume of each timbre.  
Saving your edits  
Once youve tweaked the sound to perfection,  
1. Access the COMBI 0: Play, Mixer page.  
youll want to save your work. To save your edits:  
2. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to highlight  
the “Volume” of the timbre whose volume  
setting you want to adjust, and use the  
[VALUE] dial etc. to adjust the setting.  
1. Press the [UTILITY] button to access the utility  
menu.  
2. Use the ClickPoint to select “Write  
Combination,” and then press the ClickPoint  
center.  
Adjusting the volume while preserving  
the volume balance between timbres  
The Write Combination dialog box will appear.  
1. Press the [UTILITY] button to access the utility  
menu.  
Note: If the display indicates “Memory  
Protected,” the combination memory protect is  
turned on. Go to GLOBAL 0: System,  
2. Use the ClickPoint [π][] to select “Hold  
Preference page, and uncheck the Memory  
Protect “Combination” setting. (p.88)  
Balance,” and press the ClickPoint center.  
The upper right of the display will indicate  
“Hold Bal.”  
3. Optionally, you can also select a new location,  
or change the Combinations name.  
If you want to change the bank and number of  
the writing destination, use the ClickPoint to  
select the combination name located at the right  
of the “To,” and use the [VALUE] dial to select  
the desired writing destination.  
3. When you change the “Volume” value of any  
timbre, the volume of all timbres will also  
change to preserve the volume balance at the  
time you checked the Hold Balance setting.  
If you want to change the name, use the Click-  
Point to select the text button ( ) and then  
press the ClickPoint center to open the text edit  
dialog box.  
4. To defeat this setting, press “Hold Balance”  
You can give the Combination a descriptive  
name using the on-screen keyboard. (p.114)  
After entering the name, press [MENU/ OK]  
button.  
once again and press the ClickPoint center.  
The text edit window will disappear, returning  
you to the main Write dialog.  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2],  
[3], [4], [SELECT]  
Just as in Program mode, you can use the realtime  
controller [1]–[4] knobs and [SELECT] button in  
Combination mode to modify sounds and effects,  
or to control the arpeggiator. See “REALTIME  
If you want to specify the category, use the  
ClickPoint to select “Category,” and use the  
[VALUE] dial to specify the desired category.  
The category you specify here can be used  
when selecting by category with the  
[CATEGORY] button. (p.58)  
The REALTIME CONTROLS [1]–[4] knobs can  
transmit MIDI messages (as specified by the exter-  
nal control setup) to your external MIDI equip-  
ment. If you turn the [EXT. CONTROLLER]  
button on (lit), these knobs will be switched to the  
external control function, and will be disconnected  
from the internal sound generator. For more about  
4. In the Write Combination dialog box, press the  
[MENU/ OK] button to write (save) the  
program.  
5. A message will ask you for confirmation. If you  
are sure you want to write the program, press  
the [MENU/ OK] button once again.  
The combination will be written (saved).  
Note: The REALTIME CONTROLS A-mode and B-  
mode can control timbres of the same channel as  
the global MIDI channel.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playing and Editing Combinations  
Detailed Editing with Combinations  
You can edit any of the preloaded combinations or  
Layer, split, and velocity switch  
start with an initialized Combination (Bank C 127:  
Init. Combination) to create your own original  
sounds.  
You can use the factory Programs to create new  
Combinations, or use your own custom Programs.  
You can write (save) these combinations in any  
bank A–C.  
In the COMBI 5: EdKey Zone, Key page and the  
6: Vel Zone, Vel page, specify the range (layer,  
split, velocity switching, etc.) in which each pro-  
gram will sound.  
Adjust the programs so that they fit  
within the combination  
For each timbre program, specify the poly/ mono  
setting and adjust timbre parameters such as por-  
tamento and transpose.  
Before you begin editing  
A combination has eight timbres. Each timbre con-  
sists of a program with parameters such as key-  
board zone, velocity zone, mixer settings, MIDI  
channel, and filter. See the diagram entitled “Com-  
bination structure and corresponding pages.”  
Effects  
The output of each timbre is sent to the insert  
effect, the master effects, and the master EQ. You  
can use the mixer section to freely specify how the  
audio signals will be routed.  
There is one insert effect and two master effects,  
and for each of these you can choose one of 89  
effect types. The master EQ is a stereo three-band  
EQ.  
Overview of Combi mode parame-  
ters  
Note: The effect settings created and saved with a  
program in Program mode are not used in  
Combination mode. Effect settings are made  
independently for the combination.  
Select a program for each timbre  
In the COMBI 0: Play, Prog page (or COMBI 1: Ed–  
Tone Adjust, Prog page), select a program for each  
timbre.  
Arpeggiator  
Status and MIDI settings  
A combination can use two arpeggiators (dual  
polyphonic arpeggiators). You can select the  
arpeggio pattern, specify the range in which the  
arpeggio is generated, and specify the region of  
notes (keys) or velocities that will trigger the  
arpeggiator.  
In the COMBI 2: EdTrack Param, MIDI page, set  
“Status” to INT for the timbres that you want to  
play, and set their MIDI channel to the global  
MIDI channel.  
Combination structure and corresponding pages  
Controller Setup : 7-5  
Arpeggiator: 7-1...4  
Timbre1  
Parameters  
Parameters  
Parameters  
Parameters  
Program  
Insert Effect :  
8-1  
Timbre2  
Master Effect 1, 2 :  
9-1...3  
Program  
Timbre3  
Timbre  
Program  
Insert Effect :  
8-2, 3  
MasterEQ :9-4  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
L/MONO, R  
Timbre4  
Program  
Insert Effect  
Master Effect  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
INDIVIDUAL 1,2  
Individual Outputs  
Timbre8  
Parameters  
Program  
1–1, 9–4, etc. indicate the microX on-screen pages and tabs.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting a program for each timbre  
Overview of editing pages  
Selecting a program for each  
timbre  
You can select a program for each timbre in the  
COMBI 0: Play, Prog page or in the COMBI 1: Ed–  
Tone Adjust, Prog page.  
In the COMBI 0: Play page you can select and play  
combinations, select the program used by each  
timbre, adjust the mixing, and adjust the arpeggia-  
tor setting.  
The other pages let you modify the sound in more  
detailed ways.  
• Select and play combinations.  
• Select a program for each timbre, and set  
status, pan, and level. (Same as the 1:Ed–  
Tone Adjust parameters; can be edited  
from either page.)  
0:Play  
Status and MIDI settings  
• Select an arpeggio pattern and make  
settings.  
• Select an external control set.  
“Status”and MIDI channel  
• Select a program for each timbre, and set  
1:EdTone Adjust  
2:EdTimbre Param  
status, pan, and level.  
• Use Tone Adjust to adjust parameters.  
Status  
This controls the status of MIDI and the internal  
tone generator for each Timbre. Normally, if  
youre playing an internal Program, this should be  
set to INT.  
• MIDI, OSC, Pitch, Delay, and Scale settings  
for each timbre.  
3:EdMIDI Filter1  
4:EdMIDI Filter2  
5:EdKey Zone  
6:EdVel Zone  
• MIDI message transmission/reception  
filter settings for each timbre.  
If the status is set to Off, EXT, or EX2, that internal  
sounds will not be played. Off simply disables the  
Timbre entirely. The EXT and EX2 settings allow  
the Timbre to control an external MIDI device.  
Key zone settings for each timbre.  
Velocity zone settings for each timbre.  
Arpeggiator settings. (Same as the 0:Play  
parameters; can be edited from either  
page.)  
7:EdArp/Ctrls  
Bank Select (when status=EX2)  
Controller settings.  
When the Status is set to EX2, these parameters  
allow you to transmit MIDI Bank Select messages  
for changing banks on external MIDI devices.  
BUS and master effect send level settings  
for each timbre.  
Insert Effect routing, selection, and  
settings.  
8:EdInsertFX  
9:EdMasterFX  
MIDI Channel  
• Master Effect selection and settings.  
• Master EQ settings.  
Timbres that you wish to play from microX’s key-  
board must be set to the global MIDI channel.  
Your playing on the keyboard is transmitted on  
the global MIDI channel, and will sound any tim-  
bre that matches this channel. Normally you will  
set this to Gch. When this is set to Gch, the MIDI  
channel of the timbre will always match the global  
MIDI channel, even if you change the global MIDI  
channel.  
For details on how to access each mode, page, and  
the utility commands, and how to edit values, see  
Comparing (original and edited  
sounds)  
When youre in the process of editing a sound,  
pressing the [COMPARE] button will recall the  
saved version of the sound, as it was before you  
started editing. To indicate that you are listening  
to the saved version, the buttons LED will light  
up.  
On some preloaded combinations, Timbres  
used by arpeggiator may have their MIDI  
Channels set to something other than Gch.  
These will be timbres that play only when  
arpeggiator is on–a very useful technique for  
creating “arpeggiator-utilized” combinations.  
For more details, see “The arpeggiator in  
particular, note the relationships between  
arpeggiator assignments and MIDI Channel.  
Pressing [COMPARE] button again returns you to  
the version you are editing, and the LED will go  
out again.  
If you edit while the COMPARE LED is lit, the  
button will again go dark and your previous edits  
will be lost.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Playing and Editing Combinations  
MIDI filter settings  
Here you can specify whether the MIDI data sent  
and received by timbres 1–8 will be filtered.  
Layers, Splits, and Velocity  
switches  
Within a Combination, you can use note number  
and velocity to determine which Timbres will  
sound.  
The Programs assigned to each Timbre can sound  
in three ways: as part of a layer, a split, or a veloc-  
ity switch. A Combination can be set to use any  
one of these methods, or to use two or more of  
these methods simultaneously.  
If a check box is checked, the corresponding MIDI  
data can be sent and received. If “Status” is INT,  
movements of the microX’s controllers or incom-  
ing MIDI data will apply an effect for the program  
of that timbre. (Effect Dynamic Modulation func-  
tionality is not affected by these settings.) If the  
“Status” is EXT or EX2, movements of the  
microX’s controllers will transmit MIDI data on  
the channel of that timbre. MIDI transmit/ receive  
settings for the entire microX are made in “MIDI  
Filter” (GLOBAL 1).  
Layer  
Layers cause two or more Programs to sound  
simultaneously when a note is played.  
Program A  
Program B  
Layer:  
Two or more programs sound  
simultaneously.  
If a check box is unchecked, the corresponding  
MIDI data will not be sent or received.  
Split  
As another example, lets say that youve selected  
a bass Program for Timbre 1, and a piano Program  
for Timbre 2, with the goal of creating a bass/  
piano split. You could make the following settings  
so that pressing the damper pedal affects only  
Timbre 2s piano sound:  
Splits cause different Programs to sound on differ-  
ent areas of the keyboard.  
Program B  
Program A  
Split:  
Different programs will sound in  
different areas of the keyboard.  
1. Access the COMBI 3: EdMIDI Filter1, -2 page.  
2. Un-check the Damper CC#64 box for Timbre 1.  
3. Check the Damper CC#64 box for Timbre 2.  
Velocity Switch  
Velocity Switches cause different Programs to  
sound depending on the velocity (how hard you  
play the notes).  
Program B  
Program A  
Strong  
Soft  
Keyboard playing  
dynamics  
Velocity Switch:  
Keyboard playing dynamics  
(velocity) switches between  
different programs.  
On microX, you can use a different Program for  
each of up to eight Timbres, and combine two or  
more of the above methods to create even more  
complex setups.  
Program A  
Program D  
Program C  
Strong  
Soft  
Keyboard playing  
dynamics  
Program B  
Example:  
B and C/D are split. In the lower  
keyboard range, A and B are  
layered. In the higher keyboard  
range, C and D are switched by  
velocity and layered with A.  
As an additional possibility, you can set the slope  
for a key zone or velocity zone so that the volume  
diminishes gradually. This lets you change a split  
into a keyboard crossfade, or a velocity switch into  
a velocity crossfade.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Layers, Splits, and Velocity switches  
the sound will change gradually instead of  
changing suddenly.  
Keyboard X-Fade (keyboard  
crossfade):  
As you play from low notes to  
high notes, the volume of A  
will fade out, and the volume  
of B will fade in.  
Program B  
Program A  
Creating Key Splits and Layers  
Let’s create a Combi which combines both splits  
and layers, like the diagram below:  
5. The COMBI 5: EdKey Zone, Review page  
shows a graphic indication of the region of keys  
(or note data) for which timbres 1–8 will play.  
The region that will sound is shown as a line,  
and the shaded area indicates the portion  
occupied by the slope.  
Timbre 1  
Timbre 2  
Timbre 3  
Piano  
Brass  
Strings  
C–1  
B3 C4  
G9  
1. Access the COMBI 0: Play, Prog page.  
2. Select a piano sound for Timbre 1, a brass  
sound for Timbre 2, and a strings sound for  
Timbre 3.  
3. Access the COMBI 2: EdTimbre Param, MIDI  
page.  
Creating Velocity Switches  
4. For Timbres 1–3, set Status to INT and MIDI  
Next, lets create a simple velocity switched Com-  
bination, like the diagram below:  
Channel to Gch (the Global Channel).  
5. Access the COMBI 5: EdKey Zone, Key page.  
127  
Timbre 1  
Timbre 2  
Brass  
64  
63  
1
Velocity  
switch  
6. Set Timbre 1s Top Key to G9, and its Bottom  
Strings  
Key to C4.  
7. Set Timbres 2 and 3 to a Top Key of B3, and a  
Bottom Key of C–1.  
1. Access the COMBI 0: Play, Prog page.  
The piano program will sound when you play a  
key above or including C4. The brass program  
and strings program will sound when you play  
a key below C4.  
2. Select a brass sound for Timbre 1, and a strings  
sound for Timbre 2.  
3. Access the COMBI 2: EdTimbre Param, MIDI  
page.  
4. For Timbres 1–2, set “Status” to INT and MIDI  
Channel to Gch (the Global Channel).  
5. Access the COMBI 6: EdVel Zone, Vel page.  
6. Set Timbre 1s Top Velocity to 127, and its  
Bottom Velocity to 64.  
Key Zone Slope  
7. Set Timbre 2 to a Top Velocity of 63, and a  
In addition to “hard” splits, in which the sound  
changes abruptly, you can use the “Slope” param-  
eters to gradually fade a sound in or out over a  
range of keys.  
Bottom Velocity of 1.  
The strings program will sound when you play  
the keyboard softly, and the brass program will  
sound when you play strongly.  
We’ll assume that you are continuing to edit from  
the preceding example.  
1. Access the COMBI 5: EdKey Zone, Key page.  
2. In the example above, you could set the  
Bottom Key” of timbre 1 to G3, and set the  
Top Key” of timbre 2 to G4, so that these two  
timbres overlap.  
3. Access the COMBI 5: EdKey Zone, Slope page.  
4. Next, if you set the “Bottom Slope” of timbre 1  
to 12, and set the “Top Slope” of timbre 2 to 12,  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playing and Editing Combinations  
Velocity Zone Slope  
Altering Programs to fit  
within a Combination  
You can make various changes to Programs within  
the context of a particular Combination, to make  
them fit better with other Programs, or to create  
particular sonic effects. These changes do not  
affect the original Programs, or how those Pro-  
grams sound in other Combinations.  
Similar to Key Zone Slopes, as described above,  
these let you fade in and fade out sounds gradu-  
ally over a velocity range, instead of a simple hard  
switch.  
We’ll assume that you are continuing to edit from  
the preceding example.  
1. Access the COMBI 6: EdVel Zone, Vel page.  
2. In the case of the above example, you could set  
the velocity zones of the two Timbres so that  
they partially overlap.  
Specifying how the timbre will  
sound  
3. Access the COMBI 6: EdVel Zone, Slope page.  
4. Then, set the “Top Slope” and “Bottom Slope”  
so that the sound changes gradually, instead of  
changing suddenly between velocity values of  
63 and 64.  
You can make these settings in COMBI 2: EdTim-  
bre Param, OSC.  
5. The COMBI 6: EdVel Zone, Review page  
shows a graphic indication of the region of  
velocities for which timbres 1–8 will play. The  
region that will sound is shown as a line, and  
the shaded area indicates the portion occupied  
by the slope.  
Force OSC Mode  
Normally this should be set to PRG, so that the  
sound will play as set by the original Program.  
If you wish to force a polyphonic program to  
sound monophonically, set this either to Mono or  
LGT (Legato). Conversely, set this to Poly if you  
wish to force a monophonic program to play poly-  
phonically.  
OSC Select  
Normally, this should be set to Both.  
If the timbre is using a program whose Oscillator  
Mode is Double, and you want only OSC1 or  
OSC2 (not both) to sound, set this to OSC1 (only  
OSC1 will sound) or OSC2 (only OSC2 will  
sound).  
Portamento  
Normally, this should be set to PRG.  
If the Program uses portamento, but youd like to  
disable this for the current Combination, set this  
parameter to Off.  
Conversely, if you want to force the portamento to  
be on, or just to change the portamento time, set  
this to a value of 001–127. The portamento will  
change to use the newly specified time.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Altering Programs to fit within a Combination  
Adjusting the pitch  
Delay and scale settings  
You can make these settings in COMBI 2: EdTim-  
bre Param, Pitch.  
You can make these settings in COMBI 2: EdTim-  
bre Param, Other.  
Transpose, Detune (BPM Adjust)  
Delay  
These parameters adjust the pitch of the timbre.  
You can set some Timbres so that they dont sound  
immediately at note-on. This can create cool  
effects, and more dramatic layers.  
In a layer-type combination, you can set two or  
more timbres to the same program, and create a  
richer sound by using “Transpose” to shift their  
pitch apart by an octave or by using “Detune”  
to create a slight difference in pitch between the  
two.  
You can specify the delay for each Timbre either in  
milliseconds (ms), or in rhythmic values which  
sync to the system tempo.  
If you set the “Delay” to Key Off, the Timbre will  
In split-type combinations, you can use “Trans-  
pose” to shift the pitch (in semitone units) of  
the programs specified for each key zone.  
sound when the note is released.  
Use Programs Scale  
If you wish to change the playback pitch of a  
drum program, use “Detune.” If you change  
the “Transpose” setting, the relationship  
between notes and drum sounds will change.  
This specifies the scale for each timbre.  
If you check “Use Programs Scale,” the scale  
specified by the program will be used. Timbres for  
which this is not checked will use the Scale setting  
Type (Combi scale).”  
Adjusting the BPM of multisamples  
If youre using a phrase or rhythm loop multisam-  
ple in the program of a timbre, you can adjust its  
BPM. You can use the utility menu “Detune BPM  
Adjust” to call up a new BPM value. This changes  
the BPM by adjusting the playback pitch.  
For more details, see “Detune BPM Adjust” (PG  
p.41).  
Editing Programs with Tone Adjust  
Using Tone Adjust, you can make detailed edits to  
Programs within the context of the Combi. You  
can assign six parameters to each timbre and  
adjust them, but you can also re-specify parame-  
ters and make further adjustments.  
Proceed as follows.  
Specifying the range of pitch change  
1. Of the COMBI 1: EdTone Adjust, TA1–TA3  
controlled by the joystick (+X, X)  
This is specified by the “Bend Range.” You can  
specify the range in semitone units. With the PRG  
setting, the pitch bend range will be as specified  
by the program.  
pages, access the page that you want to edit.  
2. For each timbre, use “Destination 1–6” to select  
the parameter that you want to adjust for the  
program.  
3. Use the [VALUE] dial etc. to adjust the value of  
the parameter you selected in “Destination 1–  
6.” The sound will change accordingly.  
With the default settings you can control the fol-  
lowing parameters.  
LPF Fc: Adjusts the low pass filter cutoff frequency of  
program OSC 1/ 2. This will affect the brightness of  
the sound.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playing and Editing Combinations  
Reso.HP: Adjusts the resonance level of the low  
pass filter or the cutoff frequency of the high pass  
filter for program OSC 1/ 2. The parameter that is  
controlled will depend on the filter type specified  
for the program.  
Effects  
Effects are covered in their own section of the  
manuals, so we wont go into too much detail  
F EG Int: Adjusts the filter EG intensity (the depth  
of the filter EG) for program OSC1/ 2.  
Insert Effect  
You can make settings for the insert effect in the  
COMBI 8: EdInsertFX page.  
A EG A: Adjusts the EG attack times of the pro-  
gram OSC 1/ 2 filter and amp. To maximize the  
result of this adjustment, the Amp EG sustain  
level, attack level, start level modulation, and  
attack time modulation will also be adjusted at the  
same time.  
The output of each timbre can be sent to the insert  
effect. You can use any type of effects, from distor-  
tions and compressors to choruses and reverbs.  
A EG D: Adjusts the EG decay time and slope  
time of the program OSC 1/ 2 filter and amp.  
The Insert Effect can be routed to the main out-  
puts, or to any of the individual outputs. (p.84)  
A EG R: Adjusts the EG release time of the pro-  
gram OSC 1/ 2 filter and amp.  
Master Effects  
You can make master effect settings in the COMBI  
9: EdMasterFX page.  
There are two Master Effects, which are accessed  
through Sends 1 and 2. These are best-suited to  
effects such as reverbs and delays, but you can use  
them with any type of effect. (p.85)  
Master EQ  
You can make master EQ settings in the COMBI 9:  
EdMasterFX page.  
The master EQ is located immediately before the  
(MAIN OUTPUT) L/ MONO and R outputs. Use it  
to adjust the overall tone. (p.85)  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using and Editing Multi sets  
Multi mode is great when you want the microX to  
The “Multi Modesetting  
simultaneously play multiple tracks of data from  
your external MIDI sequencer. This section  
explains how to use the Multi mode.  
This setting is located in GLOBAL 0: System, Pref-  
erence page, “Multi Mode,” and you can change it  
to suit the way in which youre using the microX.  
You can use the microX as a sixteen-channel multi-  
timbral sound module. It has sixteen tracks, and  
you can assign a different sound program to each  
track, such as track 1 playing the drums, track 2  
playing the bass, track 3 playing the piano, and so  
on.  
for Ext-Seq: Choose this if youre using the  
microX as a multi-timbral sound module. When  
you switch multi sets on the microX, program  
changes and other MIDI messages will not be  
transmitted even by tracks whose “Status” is EXT  
or BTH.  
You can make settings such as volume and pan for  
each of these tracks. You can also use realtime con-  
trollers to vary the sound.  
for Master: Choose this if youre using the microX  
as a master keyboard. In this case when you  
switch multi sets on the microX, program changes  
and other MIDI messages will be transmitted from  
tracks whose “Status” is EXT or BTH, allowing  
you to set up your external sound module in this  
way.  
In addition, you can use the arpeggiator and syn-  
chronize it to the tempo of your external MIDI  
sequencer.  
The microX can also be used as a master keyboard  
to control your external MIDI sound modules.  
MIDI considerations  
In Multi mode you will normally switch programs  
and control the volume and pan etc. by sending  
MIDI messages from your MIDI sequencer or  
DAW software, but in this section of the manual  
well explain how to make these settings from the  
microX itself. However, making these settings in  
the microX does not automatically make these set-  
tings a part of the sequence itself.  
Page number and name  
Category number  
and name  
Parameter name  
Tempo  
Mode name  
Tab name  
Cntrol  
Track  
Multi Select  
(multi set  
numberand  
name)  
Tab  
Control assign list  
These settings can be transferred to your MIDI  
sequencer by sending a data dump from the  
microX (if your MIDI sequencer can receive exclu-  
sive messages) or by using the included “microX  
Plug-In Editor” software to read this data from the  
microX. Then you can send these settings from  
your sequencer back to the microX when needed.  
2. Make sure that “Multi Select” (multi set  
number and name) is selected.  
3. Use the [VALUE] dial etc. to select the multi set  
you want to play.  
2
3
Selecting a multi set  
1
Selecting multi sets from the front  
panel  
You can use either of the following methods to  
select a program.  
1. Press a [MULTI] button. (The button will light.)  
Turn the [VALUE] dial.  
You will enter Multi mode. Notice that the  
upper line of the display indicates “MULTI 0:  
Play” (mode name, page number and name).  
Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight  
the field, then use [π][] to select a multi set,  
and press the center to finalize your selection.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Using and Editing Multi sets  
microX’s keyboard and operate its controllers  
to hear the microX’s internal tone generator  
with the settings (program and level etc.) of the  
track you specified as the “Control Track.” Any  
other tracks that have a matching MIDI channel  
will also sound at this time. If the “Status” of  
the track is EXT, EX2, or BTH, the  
Other ways to select a multi set  
You cant use a foot switch connected to the  
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack to change multi sets.  
For details on how to select a multi set via MIDI,  
Assigning a program to a  
track,and setting the volume  
and pan  
corresponding MIDI messages will be  
transmitted on the MIDI channel that is  
specified for that track.  
Receiving MIDI data from an external  
sequencer to play the microX  
By default, the microX’s tracks 1 through 16 are set  
to MIDI channels 1 through 16, with track 1 receiv-  
ing channel 1, track 2 receiving channel 2, and so  
on.  
Selecting a track program from the  
microX  
1. Access the MULTI 0: Play, Program page.  
This page shows all 8 Tracks at once, including  
their Program assignments, volume, pan, play/  
mute, solo, and more.  
1. To hear the track (1) whose “MIDI Channel”  
setting is 1, transmit performance data (MIDI  
note-on/ off messages) from your external  
MIDI sequencer on MIDI channel 1.  
If the “Status” is INT or BTH, the microX’s tone  
generator will sound. If the “Status” is Off,  
EXT, or EX2, the microX’s tone generator will  
not sound.  
2. Use the ClickPoint to highlight “Program  
Select,” and use the [VALUE] dial etc. to select a  
program.  
Silencing a specific track (Mute)  
You can use either of the following methods to  
select a program.  
The microX provides a Mute function that lets you  
temporarily silence the desired track(s) 1–16. For  
example, you can use this to listen only to the  
rhythm section while you record a new track. You  
can also use this function to modify the structure  
of the song.  
Turn the [VALUE] dial.  
Press the center of the ClickPoint to highlight  
the field, then use [π][] to select a program,  
and press the center to finalize your selection.  
1. Access the MULTI 0: Play, Program page.  
2. Select the “PLAY/ MUTE” and press the  
ClickPoint center.  
Checking the sound of a track  
Each time you press, the PLAY and MUTE  
settings will alternate.  
Playing the microX’s keyboard to hear  
the sound  
1. Use the “Control Track” setting to choose the  
track that will respond to the microX’s  
keyboard.  
If MUTE is selected, this track will not produce  
sound even if it receives note data from the  
microX’s keyboard or from an external device.  
Note: The mute setting of each track will not be  
written (saved).  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Assigning a program to a track, and setting the volume and pan  
MIDI data is transmitted and received on the  
MIDI channel that is specified separately for each  
track by “MIDI Channel.”  
Adjusting the pan (stereo position)  
Heres how to adjust the pan of each track.  
1. Access the MULTI 0: Play, Mixer page.  
Data from Arp.  
Operations on the  
microX  
Received data  
This page shows the pan and volume settings  
for the programs assigned to tracks 1–16.  
Internal  
tone  
generator  
Internal  
MIDI OUT/  
USB  
MIDI OUT/  
USB  
Status  
tone  
generator  
INT  
×
EXT, EX2  
BTH  
×
×
2. Use the ClickPoint to highlight the “Pan” of the  
track whose pan setting you want to adjust,  
and use the [VALUE] dial etc. to adjust the  
setting.  
For more details, see “Status” (PG p.61).  
Bank select (when Status = EX2)  
If the “Status” is EX2, the LSB value and MSB  
value of the “Bank Select MSB/ LSB” will be  
enabled, and the bank number you specify here  
will be transmitted via MIDI.  
A setting of C064 is center, L001 is far left, and  
R127 is far right. With a setting of RND, the  
stereo location will change randomly between  
left and right each time a note is played.  
MIDI channel  
This specifies the MIDI channel that the track uses  
to send and receive note data. If multiple tracks  
are set to the same MIDI channel, and their “Sta-  
tus” is set to INT, they will all sound and be con-  
trolled in the same way when they receive MIDI  
data.  
Adjusting the volume  
Heres how to adjust the volume of each track.  
1. Access the MULTI 0: Play, Mixer page.  
2. Use the ClickPoint to highlight the “Volume” of  
the track whose volume setting you want to  
adjust, and use the [VALUE] dial etc. to adjust  
the setting.  
The “Control Track” setting specifies the track that  
is played by the microX’s keyboard and controlled  
by its controllers. Data on the “MIDI Channel” of  
the “Control Track” will play the microX’s internal  
tone generator according its track settings (pro-  
gram, level, etc.) if the tracks Status” is INT or  
BTH, and will also play any other tracks on the  
same MIDI channel whose “Status” is INT or BTH.  
If the “Status” is EXT, EX2, or BTH, these mes-  
sages will be transmitted on the MIDI channel  
specified by the track.  
“Status”and MIDI channel  
Status  
This specifies the MIDI status of the internal tone  
generator for each track.  
MIDI filter settings  
Each MIDI filter item specifies whether the corre-  
sponding MIDI message will be transmitted and  
received. The message can be transmitted and  
received if the check box is checked. (p.64  
If you want the microX’s internal tone generator to  
sound, choose the INT or BTH setting. These set-  
tings let you use your external MIDI sequencer to  
play the microX as a multi-track sound module.  
The BTH setting lets you control an external MIDI  
device at the same time that you play the internal  
tone generator.  
Choose the Off setting for tracks youre not using.  
With the Off, EXT, or EX2 settings, the internal  
tone generator will not sound.  
With the BTH, EXT, or EX2 settings, you can play  
an external sound module on the MIDI channel of  
the “Control Track.”  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Using and Editing Multi sets  
In order to play the sounds and the arpeggiator  
in the same way as in Combination mode, you  
must choose a track that is set to the global  
MIDI channel. Play the keyboard, and you will  
hear the same sounds as when playing the  
combination.  
Copying the settings of a  
combination to a multi set  
You can copy the settings of a combination to a  
multi set. If you have a favorite combination, this  
function provides a convenient way to copy those  
sounds to the tracks of a multi set.  
9. Begin multi-track recording on your external  
MIDI sequencer, and operate the microX’s  
keyboard and controllers.  
Note: Set the global MIDI channel (GLOBAL 1:  
MIDI, “MIDI Channel”) to 01.  
When you perform multi-track recording, the  
multiple channels sounded by the arpeggiator  
will also be recorded at the same time.  
1. Select a multi set. (p.69 “Selecting a multi  
10.When youve finished performing, stop  
recording. Play back the recording, and verify  
that it reproduces the sounds you heard while  
recording.  
2. Choose the “Copy From Combi” utility.  
A dialog box will appear.  
3. Use the “Combi” field to select the combination  
that you want to copy.  
4. If you also want the effect settings of the  
combination to be copied, check the “With  
Effects” check box.  
5. Specify the tracks of the multi set to which you  
want the eight timbres of the combination to be  
copied.  
If you want to copy the settings of the  
combination to tracks 1–8, choose “Track 1 to  
8.” If you want to copy them to tracks 9–16,  
choose “Track 9 to 16.”  
6. If you want the sound of the combination  
including its arpeggiator performance to be  
recorded on your external MIDI sequencer in  
order to reproduce the same sounds as when  
you were recording, you should check the  
“Auto adjust Arpeggio setting” check box.  
This will make adjustments to the MIDI  
channel and other settings of some tracks, and  
add tracks as necessary to ensure that the  
arpeggio performance will be reproduced.  
Depending on the settings of the combination,  
you may need to make additional changes to  
the track settings.  
Note: This is available if youve selected “Track  
1 to 8.” In order to use the “Auto adjust  
Arpeggio setting” function, the combination  
youre copying must have already been written  
with its [ARP ON/ OFF] button turned on.  
7. Press the [MENU/ OK] button to execute the  
copy.  
8. Set the “Control Track” to 01.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
What you can do in Multi mode  
You can copy the settings of a combination to a  
multi set.  
What you can do in Multi  
mode  
A multi set has sixteen tracks. Each track consists  
of one program, and parameters such as keyboard  
zone, velocity zone, mixer settings, MIDI channel,  
and filter settings.  
The “PLAY/ MUTE” setting lets you quickly  
mute or un-mute a desired track.  
The Tone Adjust function lets you make  
detailed adjustments to the program used by  
each track.  
See the illustration “Multi set structure and corre-  
sponding pages.”  
Overview of Multi set parameters  
Multi mode has the following major functions.  
There are 128 multi sets. Each set lets you  
assign a program to each of the sixteen tracks,  
and you can combine these programs as splits  
and layers just as in a combination.  
Select a program for each track  
In the MULTI 0: Play, Program page, select a pro-  
gram for each track.  
Each multi set lets you make settings for one  
stereo insert effect, two master effects, and a  
stereo master EQ.  
Status and MIDI settings  
In the MULTI 2: Track Param, MIDI page, set “Sta-  
tus” to INT for the tracks that you want to play,  
and set their MIDI channel to the global MIDI  
channel.  
You can use two arpeggiators, and you can syn-  
chronize them to your MIDI sequencer.  
By setting the “Status” of a track to INT or  
BTH, you can play the microX from your exter-  
nal MIDI sequencer as a multi-track sound  
module. (PG p.55 “Multi Mode”)  
Adjust the programs so that they fit  
within the multi set  
For each track program, specify the poly/ mono  
setting and adjust timbre parameters such as por-  
tamento and transpose.  
By setting the “Status” of a track to BTH, EXT,  
or EXT, you can play an external sound module  
on the MIDI channel of the “Control Track.”  
(PG p.56 “Multi Mode”)  
Layer, split, and velocity switch  
In the MULTI 5: Key Zone, Key page and the 6: Vel  
Zone, Vel page, specify the range (layer, split,  
velocity switching, etc.) in which each program  
will sound.  
You can control the program parameters of a  
track in realtime using AMS (Alternate Modu-  
lation) or control changes. You can also use the  
MIDI Sync. function to synchronize the LFO  
speed to the tempo.  
Effects  
You can use the Dmod (Dynamic Modulation)  
function to control effect parameters in real-  
time. You can also use MIDI Sync. to synchro-  
nize the LFO speed or delay time to the tempo.  
The output of each track can be sent to the insert  
effect, the master effects, and the master EQ. You  
can use the mixer section to freely specify how the  
audio signals will be routed.  
You can assign a name to the multi set and to  
each track.  
Multi set structure and corresponding pages  
Controller Setup : 7–5  
Arpeggiator: 7–1…5  
(A, B)  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Setting parameters  
Setting parameters  
External MIDI  
sequencer  
Master Effect 1, 2 :  
9–1...3  
BUS : 8–1, 2  
Track 3 Setting parameters  
Track 4 Setting parameters  
Track 5 Setting parameters  
Track 6 Setting parameters  
MIDI IN  
Insert Effect  
8–3, 4  
:
AUDIO OUTPUT  
L/MONO, R  
MasterEQ : 9–4  
Track  
USB  
MIDI Ch  
Track 7  
Track 8  
Setting parameters  
Setting parameters  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
INDIVIDUAL 1,2  
Insert Effect  
Master Effect  
Individual Outputs  
Control Track  
Track 16 Setting parameters  
The microX’s keyboard  
1–1, 9–4, etc. indicate the microX on-screen pages and tabs.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using and Editing Multi sets  
There is one insert effect and two master effects,  
and for each of these you can choose one of 89  
effect types. The master EQ is a stereo three-band  
EQ.  
Comparing (original and edited  
sounds)  
When youre in the process of editing a sound,  
pressing the [COMPARE] button will recall the  
saved version of the sound, as it was before you  
started editing. To indicate that you are listening  
to the saved version, the buttons LED will light  
up.  
The effect settings created and saved with a pro-  
gram in Program mode are not used in Multi  
mode. Effect settings are made independently for  
the Multi set.  
Arpeggiator  
Pressing [COMPARE] button again returns you to  
the version you are editing, and the LED will go  
out again.  
A multi set can use two arpeggiators (dual poly-  
phonic arpeggiators). You can select the arpeggio  
pattern, specify the range in which the arpeggio is  
generated, and specify the region of notes (keys)  
or velocities that will trigger the arpeggiator.  
If you edit while the COMPARE LED is lit, the  
button will again go dark and your previous edits  
will be lost.  
Overview of editing pages  
The following pages let you edit a multi set in  
detail.  
Using Controllers  
Just as in other mode, you can use controllers such  
as the joystick, OCTAVE [][π] buttons, and  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1]–[4] to add a broad  
range of expression to your playing in Combina-  
tion mode.  
• Select a multi set and play the microX’s  
keyboard.  
Receive and play performance data from  
0:Play  
an external MIDI sequencer.  
• Select a program for each track, and  
specify its pan and level.  
These controls let you modify the tone, pitch, vol-  
ume, effects, etc. in realtime while you play.  
• Select an external control set.  
1:Tone Adjust • Use Tone Adjust to adjust parameters.  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1], [2], [3], and [4] will  
also function as external controls.  
• MIDI, OSC, Pitch, Delay, and Scale settings  
2:Track Param  
for each timbre.  
3:MIDI Filter1  
• MIDI message transmission/reception  
filter settings for each track.  
4:MIDI Filter2  
Altering Programs to fit  
within a Multi set  
5:Key Zone  
6:Vel Zone  
Key zone settings for each track.  
Velocity zone settings for each track.  
You can make adjustments to the sound of the pro-  
gram for each track, for example by changing the  
way it plays or by adjusting its pitch or scale.  
You can make various changes to Programs within  
the context of a particular Multi set, to make them  
fit better with other Programs, or to create particu-  
lar sonic effects. These changes do not affect the  
original Programs, or how those Programs sound  
in other Multi sets. It is the same as for a Combina-  
tion. For more details, see “Altering Programs to  
Arpeggiator settings.  
Controller settings.  
7:Arp/Ctrls  
8:InsertFX  
9:MasterFX  
BUS and master effect send level settings  
for each track.  
Insert Effect routing, selection, and  
settings.  
• Master Effect selection and settings.  
• Master EQ settings.  
For details on how to access each mode, page, and  
the utility commands, and how to edit values, see  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Layers, Splits, and Velocity Switches  
Layers, Splits, and Velocity  
Switches  
You can use keyboard regions and velocity to  
switch between different tracks in a combination,  
just as you can in a combination. For more details,  
Saving your edits  
Once youve tweaked the sound to perfection,  
youll want to save your work. To save your edits:  
1. Press the [UTILITY] button to access the utility  
menu.  
2. Use the ClickPoint to select “Write Multi,” and  
then press the ClickPoint center.  
The Write Multi dialog box will appear.  
Effects  
Effects are covered in their own section of the  
manuals, so we wont go into too much detail  
Note: If the display indicates “Memory  
Protected,” the multi set memory protect is  
turned on. Go to GLOBAL 0: System,  
Preference page, and uncheck the Memory  
Protect “Multi” setting. (p.88)  
Insert Effect  
You can make settings for the insert effect in the  
MULTI 8: InsertFX page.  
3. Optionally, you can also select a new location,  
The output of each track can be sent to the insert  
effect. You can use any type of effects, from distor-  
tions and compressors to choruses and reverbs.  
or change the Multi sets name or category.  
If you want to change the name, use the Click-  
Point to select the text button ( ) and then  
press the ClickPoint center to open the text edit  
dialog box.  
The Insert Effect can be routed to the main out-  
puts, or to any of the individual outputs. (p.84)  
You can give the Multi set a descriptive name  
using the on-screen keyboard. (p.114)  
Master Effects  
You can make master effect settings in the MULTI  
9: MasterFX page.  
After entering the name, press [MENU/ OK]  
button.  
The text edit window will disappear, returning  
you to the main Write dialog.  
There are two Master Effects, which are accessed  
through Sends 1 and 2. These are best-suited to  
effects such as reverbs and delays, but you can use  
them with any type of effect. (p.85)  
4. In the Write Multi dialog box, press the  
[MENU/ OK] button to write (save) the  
program.  
5. A message will ask you for confirmation. If you  
are sure you want to write the program, press  
the [MENU/ OK] button once again.  
Master EQ  
You can make master EQ settings in the MULTI 9:  
MasterFX page.  
The multi will be written (saved).  
The master EQ is located immediately before the  
(MAIN OUTPUT) L/ MONO and R outputs. Use it  
to adjust the overall tone. (p.85)  
Control via MIDI  
Multi mode enables the microX to function as a  
MIDI tone generator that is controlled from the  
connected computer to play ensemble music con-  
sisting of multiple instrument parts. This mode  
also permits you to use the microX as a GM tone  
generator.  
Parameters and performance data  
A multi set consists of tracks 1–16, parameters  
such as the multi set name, effect and arpeggiator  
parameters, and a tempo setting.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Using and Editing Multi sets  
You can store 128 of these multi sets in the microX.  
external MIDI sequencer. By receiving this data,  
you can change the setting of the multi set during  
the playback.  
Tracks 1–16 consist of the following “setting  
parameters,” and will transmit and receive the  
“performance data” listed below.  
** You can use performance data (MIDI RPN data)  
to change the settings of a multi set during play-  
back.  
MIDI tracks 1–16  
Setup parameters  
Other parameters: By editing the settings during  
realtime recording, you can record the corre-  
sponding MIDI exclusive messages as perfor-  
mance data on your external MIDI sequencer. This  
gives you a way to change the settings of the multi  
set during playback. (GLOBAL 1: MIDI, MIDI Fil-  
ter “Exclusive” must be checked.)  
Bank/ Program No.*, Pan*, Volume*, Status, MIDI  
Channel, Bank Select (When Status=EX2), Force  
OSC Mode, OSC Select, Portamento*, Transpose**,  
Detune**, Bend Range**, OSC On/ Off Ctrl, Delay,  
Use Program's Scale, MIDI Filter, Key Zone, Veloc-  
ity Zone, Track Name, IFX/ Indiv.Out BUS Select,  
Send1(MFX1)*, Send2(MFX2)*  
For details on Control Change messages and  
RPN (PG p.172, 175).  
Performance data  
Note On/ Off  
For details on MIDI System Exclusive messages  
(PG p.176).  
Program Change (including Bank Select)  
Pitch Bend  
After Touch (Poly After)  
Control Change  
Default Settings in Multi Mode  
The following table shows the default settings for  
Multi mode that are automatically selected, when  
GM Initialize is executed, or when the microX  
receives a GM ON messages (F0 7E 7F 09 01 F7).  
Exclusive Message  
Tempo*  
* You can record tempo as performance data by  
adjusting it while you realtime-record onto an  
Parameter  
Track1–9, 11–16  
Track10  
0
Program Select  
Pan  
G001:Acoustic Piano  
g001:(d):STANDARD Kit  
C064  
100  
C064  
100  
Volume  
Status  
2
7
8
The setting remains unchanged  
The setting remains unchanged  
The setting remains unchanged  
The setting remains unchanged  
Use Programs Scale  
Arpeggiator Assign  
Other Arpeggiator parameters  
IFX/Indiv.Out BUS Select  
L/R  
0
DKit  
0
Send1(MFX1)  
Send2(MFX2)  
40  
40  
IFX  
The setting remains unchanged  
The setting remains unchanged  
The setting remains unchanged  
The setting remains unchanged  
The setting remains unchanged  
The setting remains unchanged  
16:St. Chorus  
Pan(CC#8)  
BUS Select  
Send1  
Send2  
Other Insert Effect parameters  
9
MFX1  
MFX2  
53:Rev Smth. Hall  
Return1  
127  
Return2  
050  
Other Master Effect and Master EQ parameters  
Default settings  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control via MIDI  
Selecting a multi set  
MIDI control from the microX’s con-  
trollers  
You can switch multi sets via MIDI by sending  
MIDI Song Select messages. A song select message  
will be transmitted when you switch multi sets.  
Conversely, you can switch multi sets by receiving  
a song select message from the source you specify.  
If the Global “Multi Mode” is set to “for Master,”  
switching the multi set number will cause each  
track with a “Status” of EXT, EX2 or BTH to trans-  
mit bank select, program change, volume, pan,  
portamento, send 1 and 2, post-IFX pan, and post-  
IFX send 1 and 2 messages on the channel speci-  
fied for that track.  
If the “Status” is INT or BTH, playing the key-  
board or operating the controllers on the “Control  
Track” will play/ control the microX’s tone genera-  
tor with the settings (program, level, etc.) of the  
selected track, and any other track set to the same  
MIDI channel will also sound at this time. If the  
“Status” is EXT, EX2, or BTH, these messages will  
be transmitted on the MIDI channel specified for  
that track.  
For more about the MIDI messages transmitted  
when you operate the microX’s controllers, and  
the AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) and DMS  
(Dynamic Modulation Source) that correspond to  
each MIDI message, see “MIDI transmission when  
the X50/ microX’s controllers are operated” (PG  
p.166).  
Switching the program assigned to a  
track via MIDI  
Receiving MIDI program change messages to  
Other MIDI control  
Note: In order to select programs via MIDI  
program changes, the tracks Status” must be  
set to INT.  
For details on how the microX operates when  
transmitting or received control change messages,  
see “MIDI transmission when the X50/ microX’s  
controllers are operated” (PG p.166). For more  
about MIDI in general, see “MIDI applications”  
(PG p.171).  
The MIDI channel of a track is specified by MULTI  
2: Track Param, MIDI “MIDI Channel.” When a  
program change is received on a MIDI channel  
that matches the channel setting of a track, the  
program will change if the “Status” of that track is  
INT. However, program changes for a track will  
also depend on the “Program Change” setting.  
The “Status” setting is located in the MULTI 2:  
Track Param, MIDI page, and the “Program  
Change” setting is in the MULTI 3: MIDI Filter1, -1  
page.  
If youve installed the included “microX Plug-In  
Editor” control plug-in into your DAW software,  
you can conveniently select the microX programs  
from a list within your DAW. For more details, see  
“Editor/ Plug-In Editor Manual” (PDF).  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using and Editing Multi sets  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effects settings  
The effect section of the microX provides one  
MULTI 8: InsertFX  
insert effect, two master effects, one master EQ  
(stereo 3-band EQ), and a mixer that controls the  
routing of these components.  
BUS and master effect send level settings for  
each track.  
Insert Effect routing, selection and settings.  
MULTI 9: MasterFX  
Master Effect selection and settings.  
Master EQ settings.  
Effects in each mode  
Send  
Return  
Master Effect 1,2  
OUTPUT  
L/MONO, R  
Timbre 1  
Timbre 2  
/
/
Track 1  
Track 2  
Master EQ  
Insert Effect  
Program mode  
In Program mode, the insert effect can be used as  
part of the sound-creating process, in the same  
way that the output sound of the oscillator (OSC)  
is processed by the filter and amp to create the  
final sound. Then the master effects can be used to  
apply spatial-type effects such as reverb. The ste-  
reo 3-band master EQ located immediately before  
the (MAIN OUTPUT) L/ MONO and R outputs is  
used to make final adjustments in tone. These set-  
tings can be made independently for each pro-  
gram.  
Timbre 8  
/
Track 16  
Effect types  
You can choose from 89 types of full-digital effects  
for each effect. The effects are categorized as fol-  
lows.  
Categories of the 89 effect types  
Effect No.  
Effect types  
PROG 8: Ed–InsertFX  
Filter and dynamics effects, such as EQ and  
compressor  
01–15  
Select the BUS and master effect send level for  
the oscillator output.  
Pitch and phase modulation effects, such as  
chorus and phaser  
16–31  
32–40  
Insert Effect routing, selection and settings.  
PROG 9: Ed–MasterFX  
Other modulation and pitch-shift effects such  
as rotary speaker and pitch shifter  
Master Effect selection and settings.  
Master EQ settings.  
41–51  
52–57  
Early reflection and delay effects  
Reverb effects  
Send  
Return  
Master Effect 1,2  
OUTPUT  
L/MONO, R  
Mono and mono-chain effects in which two  
mono effects are connected in series  
Oscillator  
Filter  
Amplifier  
Insert Effect  
Master EQ  
58–89  
Here we will describe some representative effects  
in each category.  
Combination mode, Multi mode  
In Combination mode, and Multi mode, the  
insert effect can be applied to each timbre/ track.  
The master effects are used to apply overall spa-  
tial processing, and the master EQ is used to make  
overall adjustments in tone.  
These settings are made in Combination mode  
independently for each combination, and in Multi  
mode for each multi set the entire mode.  
Filter and dynamics control effects  
Equalizers (07: St.Para.4EQ–08: St.Graphic7EQ)  
divide the frequency range into several bands, and  
allow you to boost or cut the level of each band.  
Normally they are used to correct or compensate  
the sound, but they can also be used to simulate  
the frequency response that is typical of a particu-  
lar instrument (such as the resonances of a guitar  
or string instrument).  
COMBI 8: EdInsertFX  
BUS and master effect send level settings for  
each timbre.  
Compressors (02: St.Compressor) compress the  
dynamic range of the input signal. Compression  
makes the sound punchier and more consistent.  
This is particularly effective on guitar, piano, or  
drum sounds.  
Insert Effect routing, selection and settings.  
COMBI 9: EdMasterFX  
Master Effect selection and settings.  
Master EQ settings.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Effects settings  
Limiters (03: St.Limiter–04: Mltband Limit) limit  
the level of the input signal to a maximum level  
that you specify.  
Early reflection and delay effects  
Early reflection effect (41: Early Reflect) produces  
only the early reflections of a reverb effect. Using  
just these early reflections, you can add weight or  
spatial effects to a sound, such as reverberation.  
Without the reverberation, you can achieve a clean  
effect sound.  
Exciters (11: St.Exct/ Enhcr) give the sound greater  
clarity and definition. Enhancers sharpen the out-  
line of the sound, bringing it to the front of the  
mix. By using these appropriately, you can bring  
out sounds that were unclear or easily lost in the  
mix.  
Delays (43: LCR Delay–51: Sequence Dly) create  
an echo effect by delaying the sound for a fixed  
length of time. You can also make the delayed  
sound repeat (feed back).  
Distortion (06: OD/ HiGain Wah) distorts the  
sound. This simulates the distorted sound that is  
typically created on a guitar by making the ampli-  
fier distort the sound. It is often used not only on  
guitar sounds, but also on rock organ sounds.  
Dry sound  
Level  
Delay sound  
Pitch/phase modulation effects  
Chorus effects (16: St.Chorus–19: St.Ensemble, 26:  
St.BiphaseMod) are an effective way to add spa-  
ciousness and thickness to any type of sound.  
These are ideally suited for use with electric  
pianos, strings, guitars, and so on. In an ensemble,  
pitch variations between instruments create a rich,  
slightly warbling sound. Essentially, this gives the  
impression that a number of musicians are playing  
together. The chorus effect simulates this. In stereo  
performance, the stereo image is widened, thus  
creating a magnificent spatial ambience.  
Time  
Delay time  
Reverb effects  
Reverb (52: Rev Hall–57: Rev Brt. Room) is an effect  
that creates the spacious reverberation of sounds  
played in a hall or room. Reverb simulates the  
sounds that are reflected from the ceiling and wall.  
When you hear music in a concert hall, the sound  
from the instruments and voices reaches your ear  
directly, but also reaches your ear after being  
reflected off the ceiling and walls (and being  
delayed by a corresponding length of time). In this  
way, the direct sound (the “dry” sound) is joined  
by numerous reflections that create the impression  
of a large acoustical space. The way in which the  
sound is reflected will depend on the materials of  
the ceiling and walls, and also on the size and  
shape of the hall. These factors also affect the way  
in which the reverberation decays. Different effect  
types let you simulate a broad range of reverbera-  
tion, and you can also edit the parameters to make  
detailed changes to the character of the sound.  
Flanger effects (20: St.Flanger–22: St.Env.Flanger)  
add unique characteristics to a sound. Although  
similar to chorus, a flanger uses a shorter delay  
time and feeds some of the output signal back into  
the effect, creating a strong swell. Flangers work  
very well on sounds that contain a lot of harmon-  
ics, as well as on distorted guitar sounds.  
Phasers (23: St.Phaser–25: St.Env.Phaser) cyclically  
modulate the phase of the sound. They are similar  
to the chorus and flanger effects in that both use  
modulation, but the manner in which the tonal  
quality changes is different. They are effective  
with electric piano, guitars, and synth sounds with  
a reasonable sustain.  
Dry sound  
Level  
Early reflections  
Dry sound  
Sound  
source  
Other modulation and pitch shift  
effects  
Reverb sound  
Time  
Pre Delay  
Rotary speaker effect (40: Rotary SP) simulates the  
rotating speaker effect used in organs. It is ideal  
for use with organ sounds, but it will also create a  
unique effect with other sounds.  
Effects that combine two mono  
effects connected in series  
Pitch shifters (38: Pitch Shifter, 39: PitchShift Mod)  
shift the pitch of the input signal. You can mix the  
pitch-shifted sound with the original sound to cre-  
ate a chorus effect, or create special effects in  
which the pitch continues to rise (or fall).  
These connect two mono effects in series. They  
include a four-band parametric equalizer con-  
nected in series with some other effect (e.g.,  
exciter, chorus, delay), or a compressor connected  
with another effect (of the types listed above).  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect settings for a program  
Effect settings for a program  
Routing  
The structure of the insert effect, master effects,  
and master EQ is the same in each mode. How-  
ever, the routing will determine how the oscillator  
output of the program is sent to the insert effect  
and the master effects. As an example, heres how  
to specify the routing and make effect settings in  
Program mode.  
1, 2, 1/2: The output will be sent to  
(INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT) 1 or 2. (See diagram  
below)  
Note: It will not be sent to the insert effect, the  
master effects, or the master EQ.  
1. Access the PROG 8: Ed–InsertFX, BUS page.  
2. Set “BUS Select (All OSCs)” to specify where  
the oscillator output will be sent.  
L/R: The output will be sent to (MAIN  
OUTPUT) L/ MONO and R. (See diagram  
below)  
Off: The sound will not be sent to (MAIN  
OUTPUT) L/ MONO, R, (INDIVIDUAL  
OUTPUT) 1 and 2. After passing through the  
master effects, the sound is sent to the MAIN  
OUTPUT. Choose this setting if you want to  
send the sound in series through the master  
effects at the send level specified by “MFX  
Send.” (See diagram below)  
Note: After passing through the master EQ, the  
sound will be sent to (MAIN OUTPUT) L/  
MONO and R.  
IFX: The output will be sent to insert effect IFX.  
(See diagram below)  
BUS Select (All OSCs) = L/R  
PROG 8: Insert FX  
PROG 9: Master FX  
IFX / Indiv.Out  
Pan  
BUS Select  
Send1 Send2  
L/R BUS  
OSC 1  
OSC 2  
BUS Select  
= L/R  
Select from:  
L/R  
IFX  
1
Post IFX  
Insert Effect Pan(CC#8)  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(MAIN) L/MONO, R  
Post IFX  
Send1 / 2  
stereo  
Master EQ  
BUS Select  
2
1/2  
Off  
stereo  
BUS Select  
= L/R  
IFX BUS  
IFX  
Select from:  
L/R  
1
2
1/2  
Off  
Chain Master Effects Return1 / 2  
MFX1  
mono  
stereo  
MFX2  
mono  
stereo  
mono x 2  
mono x2  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(INDIVIDUAL)1/2  
BUS Select (All OSCs) = IFX  
PROG 8: Insert FX  
PROG 9: Master FX  
IFX / Indiv.Out  
Pan  
BUS Select  
Send1 Send2  
L/R BUS  
OSC 1  
OSC 2  
BUS Select  
= IFX  
Select from:  
L/R  
IFX  
1
Post IFX  
Insert Effect Pan(CC#8)  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(MAIN) L/MONO, R  
Post IFX  
Send1 / 2  
stereo  
Master EQ  
BUS Select  
2
1/2  
Off  
stereo  
BUS Select  
= L/R  
IFX BUS  
IFX  
Select from:  
L/R  
1
2
1/2  
Off  
Chain Master Effects Return1 / 2  
MFX1  
mono  
stereo  
MFX2  
mono  
stereo  
mono x 2  
mono x2  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(INDIVIDUAL)1/2  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Effects settings  
BUS Select (All OSCs) = 1/2  
PROG 8: Insert FX  
PROG 9: Master FX  
IFX / Indiv.Out  
Pan  
BUS Select  
Send1 Send2  
L/R BUS  
OSC 1  
OSC 2  
BUS Select  
= 1/2  
Select from:  
L/R  
IFX  
1
Post IFX  
Insert Effect Pan(CC#8)  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(MAIN) L/MONO, R  
Post IFX  
Send1 / 2  
stereo  
Master EQ  
BUS Select  
2
1/2  
Off  
stereo  
BUS Select  
= L/R  
IFX BUS  
IFX  
Select from:  
L/R  
1
2
1/2  
Off  
Chain Master Effects Return1 / 2  
MFX1  
mono  
stereo  
MFX2  
mono  
stereo  
mono x 2  
mono x2  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(INDIVIDUAL)1/2  
BUS Select (All OSCs) = Off  
PROG 8: Insert FX  
PROG 9: Master FX  
IFX / Indiv.Out  
Pan  
BUS Select  
Send1 Send2  
L/R BUS  
OSC 1  
OSC 2  
BUS Select  
= Off  
Select from:  
L/R  
IFX  
1
Post IFX  
Insert Effect Pan(CC#8)  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(MAIN) L/MONO, R  
Post IFX  
Send1 / 2  
stereo  
Master EQ  
BUS Select  
2
1/2  
Off  
stereo  
BUS Select  
= L/R  
IFX BUS  
IFX  
Select from:  
L/R  
1
2
1/2  
Off  
Chain Master Effects Return1 / 2  
MFX1  
mono  
stereo  
MFX2  
mono  
stereo  
mono x 2  
mono x2  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(INDIVIDUAL)1/2  
3. “MFX Send” specifies the send level from each  
2. In “Insert Effect,” select the desired insert  
oscillator to the master effects.  
effect.  
This is valid only if “BUS Select (All OSCs)” is  
set to L/R or Off.  
You can press the [CATEGORY] button and  
choose an effect from six categories.  
If IFX is selected for “BUS Select (All OSCs),”  
the send level to the master effects is adjusted  
by the “Send 1 (MFX1)” and “Send 2 (MFX2)”  
parameters (PROG 8: Ed–InsertFX, Setup page)  
after the signal has passed through the insert  
effect.  
3. In “IFX On/ Off,” turn the insert effect on/ off.  
If this is set to Off, the result will be the same as  
if 00: No Effect is selected. The input sound  
will be output without change.  
Note: You can use the Utility “Copy Insert  
Effect” to copy effect settings from another  
program, etc.  
4. Set the “Pan (CC#8),” “BUS Select,” “S1 (Send1  
(MFX1)),” and “S2 (Send2 (MFX2))” parameters  
that follow the insert effect.  
Selecting an insert effect, and rout-  
ing after the insert effect  
1. Access the PROG 8: Ed–InsertFX, Setup page.  
Pan (CC#8)”: Set the pan. This is valid only if  
The Setup page displays the state of the routing  
and the insert effect settings. In this page you  
can also make “BUS Select” settings. Use the  
ClickPoint to choose (All OSCs), and use the  
[VALUE] dial etc. to make a selection.  
BUS Select” is set to L/R.  
BUS Select”: Specify the output destination.  
Normally you will set this to L/R. If you want  
to output the sound from (INDIVIDUAL  
OUTPUT) 1 and/ or 2, set this to 1, 2, or 1/2.  
Insert Effect  
BUS Select  
Send2(MFX2)  
Send1 (MFX1),” “Send2 (MFX2)”: Set the  
send level to the master effects. For this  
example, set these to 127.  
IFX On/Off  
Pan (CC#8) Send1(MFX1)  
BUS Select  
IFX On  
Insert Effect  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Effect settings for a program  
5. Move to the IFX page, and set the parameters of  
“Chain Direction” specifies the direction in  
which MFX1 and MFX2 will be connected.  
the effect that you selected for the insert effect.  
“Chain Signal” specifies whether the signal  
sent from one master effect to the other will be  
stereo, or only L or R.  
“Chain Level” specifies the level at which the  
signal is sent from one master effect to the other  
master effect.  
For details on the parameters of each effect, see PG  
p.104–.  
L/R BUS  
Send1 Send2  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(MAIN) L/MONO, R  
stereo  
Master EQ  
Master  
Effects  
MFX Chain  
Return1 / 2  
stereo  
=Off  
Selecting master effects, and chain  
settings  
MFX1  
mono  
MFX2  
mono  
stereo  
The input level of the master effect is determined  
by the send level 1 and 2 settings (routing step 3,  
or insert effect step 4). If send levels 1 and 2 are 0,  
no master effects will be applied. Send level 1 is  
for MFX1, and send level 2 is for MFX2.  
L/R BUS  
Send1 Send2  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(MAIN) L/MONO, R  
stereo  
Master EQ  
Master  
Effects  
MFX Chain  
Return1 / 2  
=On  
MFX1  
mono  
stereo  
Chain  
Level  
1. Access the PROG 9: Ed–MasterFX, Setup page.  
MFX2  
mono  
stereo  
Chain Signal Chain Direction  
=LR Mix,  
L Only,  
R Only  
=MFX1MFX2  
MFX1 On/Off Master Effect 1 Return1  
MFX2 On/Off Master Effect 2 Return2  
Master EQ  
L/R BUS  
Send1 Send2  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(MAIN) L/MONO, R  
stereo  
Master EQ  
Master  
Effects  
MFX Chain  
Return1 / 2  
=On  
MFX1  
mono  
stereo  
Chain  
Level  
MFX2  
mono  
stereo  
MFX Chain  
Chain Signal  
Chain Signal Chain Direction  
=LR Mix,  
L Only,  
R Only  
=MFX2MFX1  
Chain Direction  
Chain Level  
2. In “Master Effect 1” and “Master Effect 2,”  
6. Move to the MFX1 or MFX2 page, and set the  
parameters of the effect that you selected as the  
master effect.  
select the type of each master effect.  
You can press the [CATEGORY] button and  
choose an effect from six categories.  
For details on the parameters of each effect, see PG  
p.104–.  
Note: The input/ output of the master effect is  
mono-in/ stereo-out. Even if you select a stereo-  
input type effect, the input will be monaural.  
Master EQ  
3. In “MFX1 On/ Off” and “MFX2 On/ Off,”  
1. Use the stereo 3-band master EQ to make final  
equalizing adjustments immediately before the  
sound is output from the (MAIN OUTPUT) L/  
MONO and R jacks.  
switch each master effect on/ off.  
If this is Off, the output of the master effect  
will be muted.  
4. In “Return 1” and “Return 2,” adjust the output  
Set the Low, Mid, and High gain in the PROG 9:  
EdMasterFX, Setup page. Low and High are  
shelving-type, and Mid is a peaking-type  
adjustment. These settings are linked with the  
Low, Mid, and High “Gain” settings of the  
Master EQ page. In addition to these settings,  
the Master EQ page also lets you specify the  
center frequency and bandwidth (Mid only) of  
each band, and make settings for dynamic  
modulation.  
level of each master effect.  
For each effect, the W value of “W/ D” (Wet/  
Dry) is the effect output level. This is  
multiplied by the return value (“Rtn”=127 is  
x1.0) to determine the actual master effect  
output level.  
5. Specify the routing of master effects 1 and 2.  
If the “MFX Chain” check box is checked,  
MFX1 and MFX2 will be connected in series.  
The settings described below are valid if this  
check box is checked.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Effects settings  
OUTPUT. Choose this setting if you want to  
send the sound in series through the master  
effects at the send level specified by “MFX  
Send.” (See diagram below)  
Effect settings in combina-  
tion, and Multi  
3. “S1” (Send1(MFX1)), “S2” (Send2(MFX2))  
specifies the send level from each timbre to the  
master effects.  
Routing  
In Combination and Multi modes, you can specify  
the routing of each timbre/ track to the insert effect  
and master effects. These settings are made in the  
same way in each of these modes. We will be using  
the example of Combination mode in our explana-  
tion here.  
This can be set only if “BUS Select” is set to L/R  
or Off.  
The actual send level will be the send level of  
each timbre multiplied by the send level of each  
oscillator of the program selected for the  
timbre. If the send level of a program is 0, the  
actual level will be zero even if the send level  
setting is raised here.  
1. Access the COMBI 8: EdInsertFX, BUS page.  
If IFX is selected for “BUS Select,” set the send  
levels to the master effects by adjusting the “S1  
(Send1(MFX1))” and “S2 (Send2(MFX2))”  
parameters (COMBI 8: EdInsertFX, Setup  
page) located after the signal has passed  
through the insert effect.  
2. In “BUS Select,” specify where the output of  
each timbre will be sent. (See diagram below)  
L/R: The output will be sent to (MAIN  
OUTPUT) L/ MONO and R.  
Selecting an insert effect, and rout-  
ing after the insert effect  
Note: After passing through the master EQ, the  
sound will be sent to (MAIN OUTPUT) L/  
MONO and R.  
Insert Effect  
BUS Select  
Send2(MFX2)  
IFX On/Off  
Pan (CC#8) Send1(MFX1)  
IFX: The output will be sent to insert effect IFX.  
1, 2, 1/2: The output will be sent to  
(INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT) 1 or 2.  
Note: It will not be sent to the insert effect, the  
master effects, or the master EQ.  
Off: The sound will not be sent to (MAIN  
OUTPUT) L/ MONO, R, (INDIVIDUAL  
OUTPUT) 1 and 2. After passing through the  
master effects, the sound is sent to the MAIN  
Routing  
IFX On  
Insert Effect  
The Setup page displays the state of the routing  
and insert effect settings.  
COMBI/MULTI 8: Insert Effect  
COMBI/MULTI 9: Master Effect  
IFX / Indiv.Out  
Pan  
BUS Select  
Send1 Send2  
L/R BUS  
BUS Select  
= L/R  
Timbre / Track 1  
Timbre / Track 2  
Timbre / Track 3  
Timbre / Track 4  
BUS Select  
= IFX  
BUS Select  
= 1  
BUS Select  
= Off  
BUS Select  
= 1/2  
Timbre / Track 8  
Track 16  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(MAIN) L/MONO, R  
stereo  
Master EQ  
BUS Select  
= 2  
Select from:  
(DKIT)  
L/R  
IFX  
1
Post IFX  
Insert Effect Pan(CC#8)  
Post IFX  
Send1 / 2  
BUS Select  
2
1/2  
Off  
stereo  
BUS Select  
= L/R  
IFX BUS  
IFX  
Select from:  
L/R  
1
2
1/2  
Off  
Chain Master Effects Return1 / 2  
MFX1  
mono  
stereo  
MFX2  
mono  
stereo  
mono x 2  
mono x 2  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(INDIVIDUAL)1/2  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dynamic modulation and BPM/MIDI Sync.  
In this example, IFX is used by 2 (timbre 2) and 5  
(timbre 5).  
Dynamic modulation and  
BPM/MIDI Sync.  
Dynamic modulation (Dmod) is a function that lets  
you use MIDI messages or the microX’s controllers  
to control specific effect parameters in realtime.  
In the same way as for a program, you can select  
the insert effect, turn it on/ off, and set the “Pan  
(CC#8),” “BUS Select,” “S1” (Send 1 (MFX1)), and  
“S2” (Send2 (MFX2)) parameters that follow the  
insert effect. (p.82)  
BPM/ MIDI Sync. is another function that controls  
effect parameters, and is used to synchronize the  
LFO speed of modulation-type effects or the delay  
time etc. of delay-type effects to the tempo of the  
arpeggiator or an external sequencer.  
Master effects  
Master EQ  
These settings are made in the same way as for  
programs (p.83).  
Using dynamic modulation to con-  
trol effects in realtime  
These examples show how you can use dynamic  
modulation to control an effect parameter in real-  
time.  
Specifying the MIDI channel that will  
control effects  
Insert effect  
1. As described in the procedure for “Effect  
49: LCR BPM Delay. Verify that a delay sound  
is being output.  
You can specify the MIDI channel that will control  
the insert effect dynamic modulation (Dmod) and  
the “Pan” (CC#8), “Send 1 (MFX1),” and “Send 2  
(MFX2)” settings that follow the insert effect.  
Then continue on to set the items described  
below.  
An asterisk “ ” is shown at the right of Ch01–16  
*
for the channel numbers of timbres that are routed  
to IFX. If multiple timbres/ tracks of different  
MIDI channels are routed to IFX, set the “Control  
Channel” to specify the channel youll use to con-  
trol the effect.  
For a combination, you will normally use the Gch  
(global MIDI channel) to control the effect.  
For a multi set, you can use any MIDI channel that  
is convenient.  
Moving the joystick to vary the delay  
level via Dmod  
“All Rt.” stands for All Routed, indicating that  
you can control the effect using the channel of any  
timbre/ track that is routed.  
1. Access the PROG 8: Ed–InsertFX, IFX page.  
2. Set “InLvl Mod” to +100.  
3. Set “Src” to JS+Y#1.  
The joystick will control the input level to the  
effect.  
Master effects  
You can specify the MIDI channel that will control  
dynamic modulation (Dmod) for the master effects.  
When you set “Src” to JS+Y#1, the level of  
delayed signal will be set to zero, and will  
gradually increase as you push up on the  
joystick.  
For a combination, you will normally use the Gch  
(global MIDI channel) to control the effects.  
For a multi set, you can use any MIDI channel that  
is convenient.  
Pressing a foot switch to vary the feed-  
back level via Dmod  
1. In the GLOBAL 0: System, Foot page, set “Foot  
SW Assign” to Foot SW (CC#82).  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Effects settings  
time will change in synchronization to any  
changes you make in the arpeggiator tempo.  
If you rotate the REALTIME CONTROLS  
knob [4] to change the tempo while the delay  
is sounding, noise may occur in the delay  
sound. This is because the delay sound  
becomes discontinuous, and is not a  
malfunction.  
2. Return to the PROG 8: Ed–InsertFX, IFX page,  
and set the C Fb (C Delay Feedback) “(Source)”  
to SW1 #82.  
For some effects, you can synchronize the  
LFO frequency to the tempo. Set the effect  
parameters “BPM/ MIDI Sync” to On, and  
BPM” to MIDI. For details see PG p.160.  
3. Set “(Amount)” to +30.  
Saving edited effect settings  
4. (Move the joystick up.) Press the foot-switch;  
the feedback level will increase, and the delay  
sound will continue for an extended time.  
Effect parameters that you edit in Program mode  
are saved when you write the program. Similarly,  
effect parameters that you edit in Combination  
mode or Multi mode are saved when you write  
the combination or multi set. (p.45, 61, 75)  
The “(Amount)” setting determines the  
feedback level when the foot-switch is pressed.  
If you set “(Amount)” to –10 and press the foot-  
switch, the feedback level will be 0.  
Bypassing the insert effect or  
the master effects  
Normally, you will switch the effects on/ off indi-  
vidually for each program, combination, or multi  
set. However, you also have the option of bypass-  
ing the insert effect or master effects for the entire  
microX if you dont want to use them.  
Using the BPM/MIDI Sync. function  
to synchronize the delay time to  
arpeggiator tempo changes.  
The BPM/ MIDI Sync. function lets you synchro-  
nize the delay time to the tempo of the arpeggio.  
1. In the PROG 8: Ed–InsertFX, IFX page, set  
BPM” to MIDI.  
For example, this can be useful when youre using  
an outboard effect such as reverb, chorus, or com-  
pressor to create an effect that you would other-  
wise create using the microX’s master effects, or  
when youre using a plug-in effect on your com-  
puter to process the sound of the microX together  
with other sound sources.  
2. For L, C, and R, set “L/ C/ R Bs” and “Times” as  
desired.  
For this example, set “L/ C/ R Bs” to and  
Times” to 1 so that the effect will be easily  
understandable. The delay time will repeat at  
an interval of a 8th note.  
1. Press the [GLOBAL] button to enter Global  
mode.  
2. Access the GLOBAL 0: System, Basic page.  
3. Set the realtime controller function to C-mode,  
and rotate REALTIME CONTROLS knob [4]  
(“TEMPO”).  
(Move the joystick up.) Operate the knob; the  
delay time will change.  
3. Check the “IFX Off” check box if you want to  
bypass the insert effect.  
4. Turn on the [ARP ON/ OFF] button to start the  
Check the “MFX1 Off” dialog box if you want  
to bypass master effect 1, or the “MFX2 Off”  
dialog box if you want to bypass master effect  
2.  
arpeggiator.  
Select an arpeggio pattern as desired.  
(Move the joystick up.) When you rotate  
REALTIME CONTROLS knob [4], the delay  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Global Mode  
How Global mode is struc-  
System setup 0: System  
tured  
Basic Page  
In Global mode you can make overall settings that  
apply to the entire microX, such as master tuning,  
key transpose, effect global switch, global MIDI  
channel, and system clock.  
In addition, you can create user drum kits, arpeg-  
giator, and scales, make settings for the damper  
pedal and assignable foot switches/ pedals, and  
specify category names for programs and combi-  
nations.  
Tuning to another instrument/Trans-  
posing  
Global mode page structure  
“Master Tune” adjusts the overall pitch. Edit this  
setting when you are playing the microX with  
other instruments, or when playing along with  
music on CD or tape. You can adjust the pitch in a  
range of ±50 cents (one semitone = 100 cents). If  
this is at 0, middle A is tuned to 440 Hz.  
Basic settings for the entire microX  
Controller settings for the pedals etc.  
connected to the rear panel  
0:System  
• MIDI-related settings for the entire  
microX  
1:MIDI  
• User registered scale settings.  
Specify 16 octave scales, and one all-  
note scale.  
2:User Scale  
3:Category Name  
“Key Transpose” shifts the pitch in semitone steps.  
Edit this setting when you want to transpose the  
sound of the entire microX. You can adjust the  
transposition in a range of ±1 octave.  
Edit category names for programs and  
combinations  
4:DKit  
Edit drum kits  
5:Arp.Pattern  
Edit user arpeggio patterns.  
Adjusting the way in which velocity  
will affect the volume or tone  
External control settings.  
Assign CC# to REALTIME CONTROLS  
knobs  
6:Ext Control  
You can adjust the way in which changes in veloc-  
ity will affect the volume or tone by selecting dif-  
ferent velocity curves. Each curve has its own  
character, so you can select the curve that is appro-  
priate for your own playing dynamics, playing  
style, and the effect that you wish to obtain. (PG  
p.76)  
For details on how to access each page, tab or util-  
ity command, and how to edit the values, see  
The edits you perform in Global mode will be  
preserved until you turn off the power is  
turned off, but will be lost when the power is  
turned off. Four types of data are handled in  
Global mode: user drumkit settings (GLOBAL  
4), arpeggiator settings (GLOBAL 5), external  
control settings (GLOBAL 6), and all other  
global settings (GLOBAL 0–3). You into its  
own memory area.  
Velocity Curve” selects the velocity curve.  
Bypassing the effects  
If the FX SW “IFX Off,” “MFX1 Off,” and “MFX2  
Off” boxes are checked, the insert effect, master  
effect 1, and master effect 2 will respectively be  
bypassed. This applies to the entire microX  
regardless of the mode. For example, if youve  
connected the microX’s outputs to an external  
mixer and are using an external effect processor to  
apply reverb or chorus to the sound, you can turn  
off the microX’s master effects.  
Note that Compare cant be used in Global  
mode.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Global Mode  
If “Power On Mode” is set to Memorize, microX  
will power on using the same mode and page that  
were selected when the power was previously  
turned off.  
Linking the arpeggiator to programs  
and combinations  
You can specify whether the arpeggiator settings  
written to a program or combination will also be  
selected when you select that program or combi-  
nation, or whether the arpeggiator settings will  
remain in their current state when you switch the  
program or combination.  
Protecting the memory  
If one or more of the “Memory Protect” boxes are  
checked, operations such as writing, loading etc.  
will be prohibited for the corresponding type of  
memory.  
When the microX is shipped from the factory, the  
former setting is selected. You can use the latter  
setting if you want to use the same arpeggiator  
settings to generate phrases and patterns while  
you select and try out different programs and  
combinations.  
If you want to edit and write (save) settings, youll  
need to uncheck this box. In order to load the pre-  
loaded data, youll first need to uncheck the Mem-  
ory Protect box for the data you want to load.  
If the Auto Arp. “Program” or “Combination”  
boxes are checked, selecting a program or combi-  
nation respectively will also select the arpeggiator  
settings that are written in that program or combi-  
nation.  
Foot Page  
OCTAVE  
When you switch programs, combinations, or  
multi sets, you have the option of also recalling  
the OCTAVE [][π] button setting that is written  
as part of this data.  
If the “OCTAVE Keys [/ π]: Use Prog/ Combi/  
Multis Octave” box is checked, the OCTAVE  
[][π] button setting written in the data will be  
recalled when you select the program etc. If this  
box is not checked, the OCTAVE [][π] setting  
will not change when you select the program etc.;  
the current setting will be maintained until you  
switch the octave yourself.  
Specifying the function of the  
ASSIGNABLE Switch and ASSIGN-  
ABLE Pedal  
Assignable Switch  
Foot SW Assign lets you assign a function to a  
footswitch, such as the optional Korg PS-1, con-  
nected to the rear-panel ASSIGNABLE SWITCH  
jack.  
This is set by “Foot SW Assign.”  
You can choose from the following functions:  
Alternate modulation source  
Effect dynamic modulation source  
Switch portamento on/ off  
Preference Page  
Control the sostenuto effect  
Turn the soft pedal effect on/ off  
Arpeggiator on/ off  
Select programs or combinations (up/ down)  
Tap tempo  
Aftertouch transmission  
The functions of controllers such as the joystick  
or knobs [1]–[4]. (PG p.164)  
Recalling the last-selected mode and  
page at power-on  
The state of microX when the power is turned on  
will depend on the setting of “Power On Mode”.  
If “Power On Mode” is set to Reset (factory set-  
ting), microX will automatically select the Combi-  
nation mode 0: Play.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
MIDI-related settings 1: MIDI  
Assignable Pedal  
Creating user scales  
2: User Scale  
You can specify the function of an assignable  
pedal, such as the optional XVP-10 EXP/ VEL  
pedal or EXP-2 foot controller, connected to the  
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack.  
This is set by “Foot Pedal Assign.”  
Creating an original scale, and  
assigning it to a Program  
You can choose from the following functions:  
Master volume  
On the User Scale page, you can create your own  
original scales. These include sixteen different  
User Octave Scales, in which the pitch of each note  
of the octave is repeated for all octaves, and one  
User All Note Scale, in which the pitch of each of  
the 128 notes can be specified independently.  
Alternate modulation source  
Effect dynamic modulation source  
Portamento pitch change speed  
Volume  
The pan following an insert effect  
Pan  
By adjusting the pitch of each key in the range of  
±99 cents, you can raise or lower it by approxi-  
mately one semitone relative to the normal pitch.  
Expression  
Send levels to the master effects  
Aftertouch transmission  
Duplicate the function of another controller,  
such as the joystick or knobs [1]–[4] (PG  
p.165)  
The user scales you create here can be used by  
specifying the scale for a program, for each timbre  
of a combination, or for each track of a Multi set.  
Note: You can use this as a source for alternate  
modulation or effect dynamic modulation, and  
use it to control program parameters or effect  
parameters. In this case, set “Foot SW Assign” to  
Foot SW (CC#82), and “Foot Pedal Assign” to Foot  
Pedal (CC#04).  
You can choose these scales from the following  
pages.  
Mode  
Program  
Page  
1:EdBasic, Program Basic  
2:EdTimbreParam, Other  
2:Track Param, Other  
Combination  
Multi  
Heres how to set the scale type for each track in  
Multi mode.  
MIDI-related settings 1: MIDI  
1. Create a user octave scale or a user all notes  
scale.  
MIDI Setup, MIDI Filter  
Select a key, and use the VALUE controllers to  
adjust the pitch. The range of ±99 raises or  
lowers the pitch approximately one semitone  
above or below the standard pitch.  
Here you can make MIDI-related settings for the  
entire microX, such as the global MIDI channel  
and the MIDI clock setting. You can also use the  
utility commands of this page to transmit MIDI  
System Exclusive data dumps. (PG p.81)  
Note: You can copy one of the preset scales and  
edit it to create an original scale. To do so, use  
the “Copy Scale” utility.  
2. Press the [MULTI] button to enter Multi mode.  
3. Press the [MENU/ OK] button, choose “Track  
Param” from the “PAGE MENU,” and then  
press the [PAGE+] button to access the 2: Track  
Param, Other page.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Global Mode  
4. If you want the Track to use the scale saved  
with its individual Program, check the tracks  
“Use Progs Scale” check box.  
Saving the global settings  
When youve finished editing in the Global mode,  
Tracks that are not checked will use the scale  
specified by Scale “Type” (Multis Scale).  
youll need to write (save) your settings.  
The edits you perform will be lost when the  
power is turned off, unless you save them.  
5. Set “Type” (Multis Scale) to select the scale for  
the currently selected song.  
1. Select one of the GLOBAL 0: System–3:  
Category Name pages.  
2. Press the [UTILITY] button to access the utility  
Setting category names  
3: Category Name  
menu, and choose “Write Global Setting.”  
3. To write (save) your settings, press the  
[MENU/ OK] button.  
A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you  
want to write the settings.  
Program, Combination Category  
4. Press the [MENU/ OK] button to write your  
settings, or press the [EXIT/ CANCEL] button if  
you decide not to write.  
The Category Name pages let you assign names to  
the Program, and Combination categories. (PG  
p.86)  
The global settings will be written (saved).  
Drum kit 4: DKit,  
Arpeggiator 5: Arp.Pattern,  
External Control 6: Ext.Con-  
trol settings  
Here you can make drum kit, arpeggiator, and  
external control settings.  
See the corresponding page listed below.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Arpeggiator settings  
The arpeggiator is a function that automatically  
generates arpeggios (playing the notes of the  
chord individually, with a constant tempo). Most  
arpeggiators produce an arpeggio when you play  
a chord on the keyboard.  
Arpeggiator features in  
Program mode  
Using the arpeggiator in Program  
mode  
1. Press one of the PROGRAM [A]–[GM] buttons.  
(The button will light.)  
The chord you play on  
the keyboard is sounded  
as an arpeggio  
Program mode is selected. (p.37 “Selecting  
(individual notes)  
As you select various programs, you will notice  
that the [ARP ON/ OFF] button will light for  
some programs. Play the keyboard of the  
microX and the arpeggio will start.  
In addition to this, the microX’s arpeggiator is a  
polyphonic arpeggiator that is able to produce a  
variety of chordal transformations or phrases  
based on the pitch or timing of the notes you play  
on the keyboard. These functions let you use the  
arpeggiator to play a wide range of patterns  
including drum or bass phrases, and guitar or  
keyboard backing riffs. It is also effective to use  
the arpeggiator as part of the sound-creating pro-  
cess when creating subtly-moving pads, synth-  
sounds, or sound effects.  
For other programs, you can press the [ARP  
ON/ OFF] button (the button will light) to turn  
on the arpeggiator. Arpeggios will begin  
sounding when you play the keyboard.  
2. As described in the following sections  
move the controllers or modify the parameters  
to change the way in which the arpeggios are  
played.  
In Program mode you can use one arpeggiator.  
In Combination mode and Multi mode, the  
microX features a Dual Polyphonic Arpeggiator  
that lets you simultaneously use two arpeggio pat-  
terns. You can take advantage of this in many  
ways, such as applying separate arpeggio patterns  
to a drum program and a bass program, or using  
keyboard zones or velocity splits to switch  
between two arpeggio patterns.  
Arpeggio controllers  
Arpeggiator on/off (ARP ON/OFF)  
Each time you press the [ARP ON/ OFF] but-  
ton, the arpeggiator will be switched on/ off.  
When this is on, the button will light, and  
playing the keyboard will start the selected  
arpeggio pattern.  
UP,  
DOWN,  
ALT1,  
ALT2,  
Preset arpeggio patterns  
[ARP ON/OFF] button  
[SELECT] button:C  
RANDOM  
With the factory settings,this contains a variety  
of preloaded user arpeggio patterns.You can  
create and write your own user arpeggio  
patterns.  
U000–250  
Knobs [1]–[4]  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Arpeggiator settings  
Rotating the knob toward the left will make the  
notes weaker, and rotating the knob toward the  
right will make the notes stronger. At the center  
position (12 o’clock), the velocity will be as  
specified by the program parameter “Velocity”  
(7: EdArp/ Ctrls, Setup page).  
Adjusting the arpeggiator tempo (TEMPO)  
1. Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT]  
button to make the right “C” LED light.  
2. Rotate the [4] (TEMPO) knob to adjust the  
tempo. The “=” value in the upper right of the  
display will change.  
Note: You can control the tone effectively by  
simultaneously adjusting the REALTIME  
CONTROLS A-mode [1] (LPF CUTOFF), [2]  
(RESONANCE/ HPF), and [3] (EG-  
INTENSITY) knobs.  
You can set this in the range of 40–240. The LED  
located above the [ARP ON/ OFF] button  
blinks at quarter-note intervals of the timing  
you specify.  
You can also set the timing from within the  
display. Use the ClickPoint to select “=” and  
turn the [VALUE] dial to specify the tempo.  
The LED will blink at the specified tempo.  
Changing the length of the arpeggio  
pattern (ARP-LENGTH)  
1. Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT]  
Note: You can set the tempo by pressing a  
separately sold PS-1 foot switch that is  
connected to the PEDAL jack (when “Foot SW  
Assign” is set to Tap Tempo).  
button to make the right “C” LED light.  
2. Turn the [3] (ARP-LENGTH) knob to change  
the length of the arpeggio pattern.  
At the center position (12 oclock), the length  
will be the same as the arpeggiators Lgth  
(Length)” setting (7: Ed–Arp/ Ctrls, Setup  
page). Turn the knob toward the left to shorten  
the pattern, or toward the right to lengthen the  
pattern. The arpeggio pattern will play  
repeatedly for the number of times specified by  
LENGTH. Changing this value will change the  
character of the pattern.  
Note: The arpeggio playback speed is affected  
by the “Reso (Resolution)” setting (0: Play, Arp.  
Play page, 7: Ed–Arp/ Ctrls, Setup page).  
If “MIDI Clock” (GLOBAL 1: MIDI) is set to  
Ext-MIDI or Ext-USB, or set to Auto and MIDI  
clock messages are being received from an  
external device, the display will indicate “=”  
EXT. This lets you synchronize the tempo  
with an external MIDI device. In this case you  
wont be able to adjust the tempo on the  
microX.  
Note: This has no effect for the preset patterns  
(UP, DOWN, ALT1, ALT2, RANDOM).  
Saving your settings  
Adjusting the length of the arpeggiated  
notes (ARP–GATE)  
The [ARP ON/ OFF] button on/ off status together  
with the REALTIME CONTROLS knob and key  
settings are saved when you write the program,  
combination, or multi-set.  
1. Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT]  
button to make the right “C” LED light.  
2. Rotate the [1] (ARP-GATE) knob to adjust the  
duration of the arpeggiated notes.  
Editing arpeggio settings that  
appear in the display  
Rotating the knob toward the left will shorten  
the notes, and rotating it toward the right will  
lengthen the notes. At the center position (12  
oclock), the note length will be as specified by  
the program parameter “Gate” (7: Ed–Arp/  
Ctrls, Setup page).  
You can make arpeggiator-related settings in the  
PROG 0: Play, Arp. Play page or in the PROG 7:  
EdArp/ Ctrls, Setup and Zone pages. The 0: Play,  
Arp. Play page contains selected parameters  
(taken from the 7: Ed–Arp/ Ctrls, Setup page) that  
are particularly effective for editing during a per-  
formance. However, parameters other than  
“Swing” can be controlled as described in “Arpeg-  
Note: You can control the effect by  
simultaneously adjusting the REALTIME  
CONTROLS A-mode [4] (EG-RELEASE) knob.  
Adjusting the level of the arpeggiated  
notes (ARP-VELOCITY)  
1. Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT]  
button to make the right “C” LED light.  
2. Rotate the [2] (ARP-VELOCITY) knob to adjust  
the strength (or level) of the arpeggiated notes.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Arpeggiator features in Program mode  
Preset-3: ALT2  
ALT2  
Editing in the PROG 0: Play, Arp. Play  
page  
Access the PROG 0: Play, Arp. Play page.  
Preset-4: RANDOM  
Selecting an arpeggio pattern (Pattern)  
An arpeggio pattern can be selected from preset  
arpeggio patterns Preset-0–Preset-4 and user  
arpeggio patterns U000–250. With the factory set-  
tings, U000–250 contain a wide variety of preload  
user arpeggio patterns.  
RANDOM  
Use the ClickPoint to select “Pattern,” and use  
the [VALUE] dial to select an arpeggio pattern.  
U000–U250  
With the factory settings, various arpeggio pat-  
terns are preloaded. These include a variety of pat-  
terns such as drum or bass phrases, or guitar or  
keyboard backing riffs.  
The way in which the pattern is played will  
depend on settings such as “Octave” and “Sort.”  
Preset-0–Preset-4 in the following diagrams show  
how the arpeggio will be played when “Octave” is  
set to 1, and “Sort” is checked. Preset-4: RAN-  
DOM is one possibility.  
Changing the timing value of the arpeg-  
giated notes (Resolution)  
Preset-0: UP  
Use “Reso (Resolution)” to specify the spacing  
between the arpeggiated notes in a range of ꢂꢃ .  
UP  
Use the ClickPoint to select “Reso,” and then  
use the [VALUE] dial to specify the spacing  
between the arpeggiated notes.  
Selecting the octave range of the arpeg-  
giated notes (Octave)  
Use “Octave” to specify the octave range in which  
the arpeggio is produced.  
Preset-1: DOWN  
DOWN  
Use the ClickPoint to select “Octave,” and use  
the [VALUE] dial to specify the octave range in  
which the arpeggio is produced.  
Octave: 4  
UP  
Preset-2: ALT1  
ALT1  
Note: If a user arpeggio pattern is selected, the  
“Octave Motion” setting (GLOBAL 5: Arp.Pattern,  
Setup page) will affect the way in which the  
arpeggio is played.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Arpeggiator settings  
Checked: When you take your hands  
Selecting the playback order of the  
completely off of the keyboard, the arpeggio  
pattern will immediately start over from the  
beginning in sync with the first key you press.  
This setting is suitable when you want the  
arpeggio to start from the beginning of the  
measure as you are playing in realtime.  
arpeggiated notes (Sort)  
“Sort” is different than selecting the arpeggiator  
pattern. “Sort” specifies whether the notes of the  
arpeggio will be sounded in order of their pitch  
(regardless of the order in which they were  
played) or in the order in which you played them.  
Unchecked: The arpeggio will always be  
synchronized to the MIDI clock tempo.  
Use the ClickPoint to select the “Sort” check  
box, and press the center.  
Checked: the arpeggio will sound each note in  
the order of its pitch, regardless of the order in  
which you actually played the notes.  
Selecting whether to hear the arpeggi-  
ated notes, the notes you physically  
play on the keyboard, or both. (Key-  
board)  
Unchecked: the arpeggio will sound each note  
in the order in which you actually played the  
notes.  
Use the ClickPoint to select the “Keyboard”  
check box, and press the center.  
Sort  
Checked: The notes you play on the keyboard  
and the notes played by the arpeggiator will  
both sound.  
OFF, UP  
Sort  
Unchecked: Only the arpeggiated notes will  
sound.  
ON, UP  
Editing in the PROG 7: EdArp/Ctrls,  
Setup page  
See the preceding section for details on parame-  
ters that can also be set from the PROG 0: Play,  
Arp. Play page. Here we will explain the remain-  
ing parameters.  
Letting the arpeggio continue playing  
even after you take your hand off the  
keyboard (Latch)  
Access the PROG 7: Ed–Arp/ Ctrls, Setup page.  
“Latch” specifies whether the arpeggio will con-  
tinue playing even after you take your hand off  
the keyboard, or stop playing when you take your  
hand off the keyboard.  
Setting the duration of the arpeggiated  
notes (Gate)  
“Gate” lets you specify the duration (gate time) of  
the arpeggiated notes. If a user arpeggio pattern is  
selected, you can set this to Step. In this case, the  
value of the “Gt” setting for each step (GLOBAL5:  
Arp.Pattern, Edit page) will be used.  
Use the ClickPoint to select the “Latch” check  
box, and press the center.  
Checked: The arpeggio will continue playing  
even after you remove your hand from the  
keyboard.  
Note: This value will be in effect when the  
REALTIME CONTROLS C-mode [1] (ARP-GATE)  
knob is in the center position (12 oclock). Be sure  
that the knob is in the center position when you  
make this setting.  
Unchecked: The arpeggio will stop playing  
when you remove your hand from the  
keyboard.  
Synchronizing the arpeggiator to your  
keyboard timing or to the tempo (Key  
Sync.)  
“Key Sync.” specifies whether the arpeggio pat-  
tern will begin the moment you play the key-  
board, or always follow the tempo in  
synchronization with the MIDI clock.  
Setting the velocity of the arpeggiated  
notes (Velocity)  
Velocity” lets you specify the velocity of the  
arpeggiated notes. If this is set to Key, the velocity  
with which you actually played the note will be  
used. If a user arpeggio pattern is selected, you  
can set this to Step. In this case, the value of the  
Vel(Velocity)” setting for each step (GLOBAL 5:  
Arp.Pattern, Edit page) will be used.  
Use the ClickPoint to select the “Key Sync.”  
check box, and press the center.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The arpeggiator in Combination and Multi modes  
Note: This value will be in effect when the  
REALTIME CONTROLS C-mode [ARP-  
VELOCITY] knob is in the center position (12  
oclock). Be sure that the knob is in the center  
position when you make this setting.  
Writing (saving) the arpeggiator set-  
tings  
Arpeggio parameters you edit in Program mode  
are saved along with the data when you write the  
program. For details on how to write, see “Saving  
Note: When a preload user arpeggio pattern is  
selected, setting the “Gate” or “Velocity” to Step  
will add a sense of groove to the arpeggio pattern.  
Linking the arpeggiator to a program  
Making the arpeggio pattern “shuffle”  
You can specify whether the arpeggio settings writ-  
ten in a program will also be selected when you  
switch to that program, or whether the existing  
state of the arpeggiator will be maintained. With  
the factory settings, the former setting is selected. If  
you want to use the latter setting, check Program in  
“Auto Arp” (GLOBAL 0: System, Basic page).  
(Swing)  
“Swing” modifies the timing of the even-num-  
bered arpeggiated notes, letting you give a “shuf-  
fle” character to the pattern.  
Editing in the PROG 7: EdArp/Ctrls, Scan-  
Zone page  
Access the PROG 7: Ed–Arp/ Ctrls, ScanZone  
page.  
The arpeggiator in Combina-  
tion and Multi modes  
In Combination and Multi mode, the microX pro-  
vides dual polyphonic arpeggiator functionality  
that lets you use two arpeggio patterns simulta-  
neously. The settings in each of these modes are  
made in the similar way.  
Specifying the range of notes in which  
the arpeggiator will operate (Key Btm,  
Key Top)  
As an example, the following explanation shows  
how to make settings in Combination mode.  
“Key Btm,” “Key Top”: The arpeggiator will oper-  
ate when you play keys within the specified range.  
Keys outside of this range can be played in the  
normal manner, and will not be affected by the  
arpeggiator on/ off.  
Using the arpeggiators as you play in  
Combination mode  
1. Press a COMBINATION [A]–[C] button. (The  
For example if you set “Pattern” to Preset-0: UP,  
check “Latch,” set “Key Top” to B3, and “Key  
Btm” to C-1, playing a note B3 or lower will trig-  
ger the arpeggiator. Since “Latch” is on, the arpeg-  
gio will continue even after you release the keys.  
You can use the C4 and higher keys to play con-  
ventionally along with the arpeggio sounded by  
the B3 and lower keys. To change the arpeggio,  
play keys in the range of B3 and below.  
button will light.)  
You will enter Combination mode. (p.57  
As you select various combinations, you will  
notice that the [ARP ON/ OFF] button will light  
for some combinations. When you play a key  
on the keyboard, the arpeggiator will start.  
For other combinations, you can press the [ARP  
ON/ OFF] button (the button will light) to turn  
on the arpeggiator.  
Specifying the range of velocities in  
In Combination and Multi set, depending on  
the arpeggiator A, B settings, the arpeggio  
may not start when you press the [ARP ON/  
OFF] button to turn it on. (p.96 “Select the  
which the arpeggiator will operate (Vel  
Btm,Vel Top)  
Vel Btm,” “Vel Top”: The arpeggiator will oper-  
ate when you play notes with a velocity (playing  
strength) that is within the specified range. Notes  
played with a velocity outside this range will be  
sounded normally, without regard to the arpeg-  
giator on/ off.  
edit the parameters to hear how the arpeggio  
changes.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Arpeggiator settings  
Note: The [ARP ON/ OFF] button and the  
REALTIME CONTROLS C-mode [1] (ARP-GATE),  
[2] (ARP-VELOCITY), [3] (ARP-LENGTH), and [4]  
(TEMPO) knobs are valid for both arpeggiators A  
and B. Their state will be memorized when the  
combination is written.  
Checking the structure of a user arpeg-  
gio pattern  
Let’s see how arpeggiators of the combination is  
constructed.  
1. Select combination C053: Echo Jamm, and look  
at the Arp. Play A page and Arp. Play B page.  
Editing arpeggio settings that  
appear in the display  
You can make arpeggiator-related settings in the  
COMBI 0: Play, Arp. Play A and B pages or in the  
COMBI 7: EdArp/ Ctrls page. The 0: Play, Arp.  
Play A and B pages contain selected parameters  
(taken from the 7: Ed–Arp/ Ctrls, Arp. A and B  
pages) that are particularly effective for editing  
during a performance. However, parameters other  
than “Swing” can be controlled as described in  
As you can see from the “Timbre Assign” table  
in the upper right, arpeggiator A is assigned to  
timbre 4 and 8, and arpeggiator B is assigned to  
timbre 2. When you play the keyboard, the Dr-  
BigBeats 2 arpeggio pattern will play the pro-  
gram DrumnBass Kit of timbre 4. The Gt-  
Stab Rhythm arpeggio pattern will play the  
program Funkin’ Guitar of timbre 2.  
With the following exceptions, the display settings  
in the 0: Play, Arp. Play A and B pages are essen-  
tially the same as for a program.  
1. Access the COMBI 0: Play, Arp. Play A page,  
and make settings for arpeggiator A.  
2. Access the COMBI 0: Play, Arp. Play B page,  
If you uncheck “Arpeggiator Run A” or  
“Arpeggiator Run B,” the unchecked arpeggia-  
tor will stop.  
and make settings for arpeggiator B.  
Arpeggiator A/B  
Arpeggiator Run  
Timbre Assign  
If you check it once again and play the  
keyboard, the arpeggiator will begin running.  
Look at the COMBI 7: EdArp/ Ctrls, Scan  
Zone page, and you will see that the A keys  
Btm” and “Top” are set so that arpeggiator A  
will operate only for B3 and lower keys, and  
that the B “Top Key” and “Bottom Key” are set  
so that arpeggiator B will operate only for C4  
and higher keys.  
Arpeggio Pattern  
Select the arpeggiator(s) that will run  
Use the “Arpeggiator Run” check boxes to specify  
the arpeggiator(s) that you want to run. The  
arpeggiator(s) that are checked here will operate  
when the [ARP ON/ OFF] button is on.  
However, the arpeggiator will play a timbre only  
if the table displayed beside the check boxes  
assigns arpeggiator A or B to a Timbre 1–8. These  
settings are made in COMBI 7: EdArp/ Ctrls,  
Setup page “Assign” (p.96).  
Dual polyphonic arpeggiator set-  
tings  
The dual polyphonic arpeggiator functionality lets  
you do the following things.  
Arpeggiator-A, Arpeggiator-B  
For each arpeggiator A and B, you can make set-  
tings for “Pattern,” “Reso (Resolution),” “Octave,”  
“Sort,” “Latch,” “Key Sync,” and “Keyboard.”  
Assign an arpeggiator for each timbre. Choose  
from Off, (arpeggiator) A, or (arpeggiator) B.  
step 5  
Independently specify whether A and B will  
operate. step 6  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The arpeggiator in Combination and Multi modes  
Select an arpeggio pattern and set parameters  
independently for A and B. step 7  
Assign arpeggiator A or B to the desired  
timbres. Each timbre will be played by the  
arpeggiator that has been assigned to it.  
Make Scan Zone page settings so that you can  
use keyboard range or playing velocity to  
switch between normal playing and arpeggi-  
ated playing, or to switch between arpeggiators  
A and B. step 8  
6. Make “Arpeggiator Run” settings.  
Check the arpeggiator(s) that you want to  
operate. The arpeggiator(s) checked here will  
run when the [ARP ON/ OFF] button is turned  
on.  
Make settings for timbres that will be silent  
when the arpeggiator is Off, and will sound  
only when the arpeggiator is On. step 10  
With the settings shown in the display for steps  
2 and 3, turning the [ARP ON/ OFF] button on  
will cause arpeggiator A to operate for timbres  
1 and 2, and arpeggiator B to operate for timbre  
3. When the [ARP ON/ OFF] button is turned  
off, timbres 1–4 will sound as a layer.  
Arpeggiator on/off  
Each time you press the [ARP ON/ OFF] button,  
the arpeggiator will be switched on or off. When  
on, the [ARP ON/ OFF] button will light. The  
selected arpeggio pattern will begin when you  
play the keyboard. The on/ off setting is saved  
when the combination is written into memory.  
If all timbres “Assign” are Off, or if neither  
“Arpeggiator Run” A or B is checked, the  
arpeggiator will not function.  
7. In the Arp. A and Arp. B pages, set the  
Note: If “Assign” is Off or “Arpeggiator Run” is  
not checked, the arpeggiator will not operate even  
if this key is on.  
parameters for arpeggiators A and B.  
The parameters for A and B are the same as for  
a program (p.92).  
8. In the Scan Zone page, specify the range in  
Arpeggiator settings  
1. Select COMBI 0: Play, Prog page.  
which arpeggiators A and B will operate.  
The parameters for A and B are the same as for  
Select programs for the timbres that you wish  
to use. For this example, select any desired  
program for timbres 1–4.  
a program (p.94).  
You can use keyboard ranges or playing  
velocity to operate the arpeggiator, or to switch  
between arpeggiators A and B. By using the  
COMBI 5: EdKey Zone, Key page and COMBI  
6: EdVel Zone, Vel page to set keyboard ranges  
and velocity ranges in conjunction with each  
other, you can create even more variations.  
2. Select COMBI 2: EdTimbreParam. MIDI page.  
For the timbres that you will be using, set  
“Status” to INT, and set “MIDI Channel” to  
Gch or to the global MIDI channel (set in  
GLOBAL 1: MIDI “MIDI Channel”).  
9. If you wish to save the edited combination  
settings in internal memory, turn off memory  
protect in Global mode, and write the  
combination.  
For this example, set timbres 1–4 to a “Status”  
of INT, and timbres 5–8 to a “Status” of Off. Set  
the “MIDI Channel” of timbres 1–4 to Gch.  
In the GLOBAL 0: System, Preference page,  
uncheck the Memory Protect “Combination”  
check box. (p.88)  
10.The “Status,” “MIDI Channel” and “Assign”  
settings shown in the display of steps 2 and 3  
can be made so that certain timbres will sound  
only when the arpeggiator is On, and will be  
silent when the arpeggiator is not Off.  
3. Select COMBI 7: EdArp/ Ctrls, Setup page.  
4. Set “(Temp)” to specify the tempo.  
This is the same as for a program (p.92).  
However, the tempo is shared by both  
arpeggiators A and B.  
5. Make “Assign” settings.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Arpeggiator settings  
Combination B071:“In The Pocket”  
Setting examples  
Although this is a somewhat sophisticated editing  
technique, we will describe the settings of one of  
the preset combinations as an example.  
Select and play combination B071: “In The  
Pocket.”  
Before you play, make sure that the global MIDI  
channel (GLOBAL 1: MIDI “MIDI Channel”) is set  
to 01.  
Combination B021: Urban Nature RnB  
Select combination B021: Urban Nature RnB, and  
play it.  
Arpeggiator A is assigned to T7 and T8, and  
arpeggiator B is assigned to T5. When you play  
the keyboard, the T7 program HipHop Kit will  
be sounded by the arpeggio pattern Dr-In The  
Pocket. The T5 program Chord Trigger will be  
sounded by the arpeggio pattern Bs-Echo.  
Before you play, make sure that the global MIDI  
channel (GLOBAL 1: MIDI “MIDI Channel”) is set  
to 01.  
Arpeggiator A is assigned to T (timbre) 4 and 5.  
When you play the keyboard, the arpeggio pat-  
tern Dr-Nature RnB will sound only the T4  
program Trance/GarageKit.  
The B “Key Btm” and “Key Top” (COMBI 7:  
EdArp/ Ctrls, Scan Zone page) are set so that  
arpeggiators B will operate only for the G3  
note and above.  
The arpeggio pattern uses the Fixed Note set-  
ting, which is appropriate when playing a drum  
arpeggio. (“Fixed Note” is checked in, GLO-  
BAL 5: Arp.Pattern, Setup page.) With this set-  
ting, the arpeggio pattern will always play the  
specified pitches regardless of the note numbers  
Arpeggiator B is assigned to T8 as well, but this  
setting is so that the T7 program HipHop Kit  
will sound only when the arpeggiator is on. See  
the preceding section “Combination B021:  
Urban Nature RnB.”  
received from the keyboard. (p.102)  
The A “Key Btm” and “Key Top” (COMBI 7:  
EdArp/ Ctrls, Scan Zone page) are set so that  
arpeggiator A will operate only for notes B3  
and lower.  
Writing the arpeggiator settings  
Arpeggio parameters you edited in Combination  
or Multi mode are saved along with the settings  
when you write the combination or multi set. For  
Arpeggiator A is also assigned to T5, but this is  
so that the T4 program Trance/GarageKit will  
sound only when the arpeggiator is on.  
Notice the timbre settings for T4 and T5  
Status  
INT  
MIDI Channel  
Assign  
T4  
T5  
02  
A
A
Linking the arpeggiator to the com-  
bination  
Off  
Gch  
If you want the arpeggiator settings of a combina-  
tion to become active when that combination is  
selected, check “Combi” for “Auto Arp” (GLO-  
BAL 0: System, Basic page).  
If the arpeggiator is off, playing the keyboard  
will sound the timbre(s) that are set to Gch or  
to the global MIDI channel (in this case, 01).  
Since the “MIDI Channel” of T4 is set to 02, it  
will not sound. T5 is set to Gch, but since “Sta-  
tus” is Off it will not sound.  
Any MIDI channel that is assigned to a timbre  
will trigger the arpeggiator. In this case, these  
will be “MIDI Channel” 02 and Gch (global  
MIDI channel). When the arpeggiator is on,  
playing the keyboard will trigger arpeggiator A  
which is assigned to T5 (Gch). T4 will be  
sounded by arpeggiator A. Since the “Status”  
of T5 is Off, it will not sound.  
Since the “Status” of T5 is Off, it will not  
sound, regardless of whether the arpeggiator is  
on or off. It is a dummy timbre that causes T4 to  
sound only when the arpeggiator is on.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a user arpeggio pattern  
Note that Compare cant be used in Global  
mode. If you want to edit a user drum kit or  
user arpeggio pattern, you should first use  
“Copy Drum Kit” or “Copy Arpeggio Pattern”  
to copy the drum kit or user arpeggio pattern  
you want to edit into a vacant number, and  
then edit the copy.  
Creating a user arpeggio pat-  
tern  
User arpeggio patterns can be created in Global  
mode.  
When you play the keyboard in Global mode,  
the instrument will sound in the state of the  
mode in which you were.  
Caution when the arpeggiator is  
used by multiple programs or combi-  
nations  
If you moved from Multi mode to Global mode,  
playing the keyboard will sound the program  
and arpeggiator of the track that matches the  
global MIDI channel (GLOBAL 1).  
When you edit a user arpeggio pattern, the  
changes will have an effect on any Program, Com-  
bination, or Multi set that uses this same pattern.  
Memory structure for the arpeggio  
patterns  
The microX has 251 arpeggio pattern memory  
areas, divided into preset arpeggio patterns and  
user arpeggio patterns as follows.  
Initializing an arpeggio pattern  
With the factory settings, all of the microX’s user  
arpeggio patterns U000–U250 contain preloaded  
data.  
Preset arpeggio patterns: There are five patterns;  
UP, DOWN, ALT1, ALT2, and RANDOM.  
The operation of these patterns is fixed, and can-  
not be edited.  
If you want to create a new arpeggio pattern,  
choose an appropriate arpeggio pattern and ini-  
tialize it.  
Note: Even if youve initialized a pattern, you can  
reload the factory preset data at any time using the  
Global mode. (p.113)  
User arpeggio patterns: There are 251 patterns -  
U000–U250 - which can develop chords or phrases  
in a wide variety of ways, based on the pitches  
that you play on the keyboard or the timing at  
which you play them.  
In GLOBAL 5: Arp.Pattern you can modify these  
user arpeggio patterns, or create a new user arpeg-  
gio pattern from an initialized condition. Edited  
user arpeggio patterns can be written to internal  
memory areas U000–U250.  
1. Press the [GLOBAL] button to enter Global  
mode, and access the GLOBAL 5: Arp.Pattern,  
Setup page.  
2. Select the arpeggio pattern that you want to  
initialize.  
Changing the memory protect set-  
ting  
When you wish to edit a user arpeggio pattern,  
first turn off memory protect by unchecking the  
Memory Protect “Arp. UsrPat” check box in the  
GLOBAL 0: System, Preference page.  
3. Access the GLOBAL 5: Arp.Pattern, Edit page.  
4. Press the [UTILITY] button. From the menu  
that appears, choose “Initialize Steps” to open  
the dialog box.  
Saving and comparing data  
The edits you perform in Global mode will be  
preserved until you turn off the power is  
turned off, but will be lost when the power is  
turned off. Four types of data are handled in  
Global mode: user drumkit settings (GLOBAL  
4), arpeggiator settings (GLOBAL 5), external  
control settings (GLOBAL 6), and all other glo-  
bal settings (GLOBAL 0–3). You into its own  
memory area.  
5. If you set “Type” to Empty, the pattern will be  
initialized to an empty state without any tones.  
If you select Full, all tones will be occupied. In  
this example, choose Empty and press the  
[MENU/ OK] button. The pattern will be  
initialized.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Arpeggiator settings  
7. The “Type (Arpeggio Type),” “Octave Motion,”  
and “Fixed Note” parameters specify how the  
arpeggio will be developed.  
Editing a user arpeggio pattern in  
Program mode  
If you enter this mode from the Program mode,  
your editing will apply to the arpeggio pattern  
specified for the selected program.  
These settings can be changed during or after  
editing.  
8. Access the Edit page.  
1. In Program mode, select a program for which  
the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit is  
selected, or a program that you wish to use as a  
basis for editing the arpeggio pattern.  
2. Press the [ARP ON/ OFF] button to turn the  
arpeggiator on (the button will light).  
A pattern consists of Steps and Tones.  
Even if you moved to Global mode from a  
program in which the arpeggiator was turned  
off, you can use the [ARP ON/ OFF] button to  
turn it on.  
Step: A user arpeggio pattern can have a maxi-  
mum of 48 steps. The arpeggiator will play  
from the first step, in steps equal to the timing  
value specified by “Reso (Resolution).” The  
vertical lines of the grid shown in the center of  
the display indicate the steps.  
3. Access the GLOBAL 5: Arp.Pattern, Setup  
page.  
Use “Step (Step No.)” to select the step. For  
each step, specify “Ptch (Pitch Offset),” “Gt  
(Gate),” “Vel (Velocity)” and “Flam.”  
To change the step, use the ClickPoint to select  
“Step” (Step No.), and then use the [VALUE]  
dial to select the desired step. In this page you  
can use the ClickPoint [][®] to move  
between steps.  
4. In “Pattern,” select the arpeggio pattern that  
you wish to edit.  
For this example, select an empty user arpeggio  
pattern.  
Tone: At each step, a chord consisting of up to  
12 tones (Tone No. 00–11) can be sounded.  
If a blank pattern is selected, playing the  
keyboard will not start an arpeggio.  
The grid of horizontal dotted lines in the center  
of the display indicate the tones.  
Note: Although preset arpeggio patterns Preset-  
0–Preset-4 can be selected, they cannot be  
edited.  
When “Step (Step No.)” is selected, you can  
press the center of the ClickPoint to specify the  
tone.  
5. In “Lgth (Length),” specify the length of the  
pattern.  
Use the ClickPoint [π][] to select a tone, and  
press the center to enter that tone. The tone will  
switch on/ off each time you press the center.  
After the pattern has played for the length  
specified, it will return to the beginning. This  
setting can also be changed during or after  
editing. For this example, set it to 8.  
Use the ClickPoint [][®] to move to the next  
or previous step. Select a step, use [π][] to  
select a Tone, and then press the center to enter.  
6. Make settings for the “(Tempo),” “Reso  
(Resolution),” “Oct (Octave),” “Sort,” “Latch,”  
“K.Sync (Key Sync.),” and “Kbd (Keyboard)”  
parameters.  
Press the [MENU/ OK] button when youre  
finished.  
Note: These are program parameters, but can be  
set from here as well.  
If after moving here from Program mode, you  
modify these parameters and wish to keep  
your changes, return to Program mode and  
write the program. These parameters are not  
saved by “Write Arpeggio Pattern.”  
For this example, make the settings shown in  
the illustration 3.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating a user arpeggio pattern  
to create a melody using a single tone.  
(“Melody pattern”)  
Tone No.  
4
3
2
1
0
“Gt (Gate)”: Specify the length of the arpeggio  
note for each step. With a setting of LGT, the  
note will continue sounding either until the  
next note of the same tone or until the end of  
the pattern. With a setting of Off, the note will  
not sound.  
01  
05  
Step No.  
Lgth(Length)  
Vel (Velocity)”: Specify the strength of the note.  
With a setting of Key, the note will sound at the  
strength with which it was actually played.  
Creating an example pattern  
Note: The “Gt (Gate)” and “Vel (Velocity)”  
settings you make here will be valid if the “Gt  
(Gate)” and “Vel (Velocity)” parameters (PROG  
7: EdArp/ Ctrls, Setup page) of the program  
selected in Program mode are set to Step. If  
these parameters have a setting other than  
Step, the “Gt (Gate)” and “Vel (Velocity)” that  
were specified for each individual step will be  
ignored, and all notes of the arpeggio will  
sound according to the settings in PROG 7: Ed–  
Arp/ Ctrls. Be sure to verify the settings of the  
program.  
1. Set “Step (Step No.)” to 01, and press the center  
of the ClickPoint.  
2. Select Tone 0, and press the center of the  
ClickPoint.  
Note: Before you set “Gt (Gate),” move the  
REALTIME CONTROLS C-mode [ARP-GATE]  
knob to the center position (12 oclock).  
3. Use the ClickPoint [®] to change “Step” to 02,  
and enter Tone 1.  
4. In the same way, change “Step” to 03 and enter  
Note: Before you set “Vel (Velocity),” move the  
REALTIME CONTROLS C-mode [ARP-  
VELOCITY] knob to the center position (12  
oclock).  
Tone 2.  
5. Set “Step” to 04 and enter Tone 1.  
6. Set “Step” to 05 and enter Tone 3.  
7. Set “Step” to 06 and enter Tone 1.  
8. Set “Step” to 07 and enter Tone 2.  
9. Set “Step” to 08 and enter Tone 1.  
10.Press the [MENU/ OK] button.  
13.To change the user arpeggio pattern name, use  
the Utility “Rename Arpeggio Pattern”  
14.If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio  
pattern to internal memory, be sure to Write the  
user arpeggio pattern (p.104).  
11.When you play the keyboard as shown in the  
illustration, the arpeggiator will begin playing.  
If you turn off the power without writing, the  
edited contents will be lost.  
Tone 0 corresponds to the pitch of the lowest  
key of chord you play on the keyboard. (If  
“Sort” is unchecked, it will correspond to the  
pitch of the first note you play.)  
15.If you wish to save the state of the program at  
the same time, return to Program mode and  
write the program (p.45).  
12.For steps 01–08, make settings for “Ptch (Pitch  
Offset),” “Gt (Gate),” “Vel (Velocity),” and  
“Flam.”  
“Ptch (Pitch Offset)”: This offsets the pitch of  
the arpeggio note in semitones up or down.  
You can input the same tone for each step, and  
change the “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” value for each  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Arpeggiator settings  
Chordal pattern  
Other examples of creating a user  
arpeggio pattern  
Melody pattern  
1. Set “Step (Step No.)” to 01, and press the center  
of the ClickPoint.  
2. Select Tone 0, and press the center of the  
ClickPoint.  
1. Set “Step (Step No.)” to 01, and press the center  
of the ClickPoint.  
3. Use the ClickPoint [®] to change “Step” to 03,  
and enter Tones 1, 2, 3, and 4. (We won’t enter a  
tone in Step 02.)  
2. Select Tone 0, and press the center of the  
ClickPoint.  
4. In the same way, change “Step” to 04, and enter  
3. Use the ClickPoint [®] to change “Step” to 02,  
Tones 1, 2, 3, and 4.  
and enter Tone 0.  
5. Change “Step” to 06, and enter Tones 1, 2, 3,  
4. In the same way, change “Step” to 03 and enter  
and 4. (We wont enter a tone in Step 05.)  
Tone 0.  
6. “Step” to 08, and enter Tones 1, 2, 3, and 4. (We  
5. Set “Step” to 04 and enter Tone 0.  
wont enter a tone in Step 07.)  
6. Set “Step” to 05 and enter Tone 0.  
7. Press the [MENU/ OK] button.  
7. Set “Step” to 07 and enter Tone 0. (We wont  
8. Use the [VALUE] dial to change “Step (Step  
No.)” to 01. Use the ClickPoint to select “Gt  
(Gate)” and change it to LGT.  
enter a tone in “Step” 06.)  
8. Set “Step” to 08 and enter Tone 0.  
9. Press the [MENU/ OK] button.  
9. Use the [VALUE] dial to change “Step (Step  
No.) to 06. Use the ClickPoint to select “Gt  
(Gate)” and change it to LGT.  
10.Use the [VALUE] dial to change “Step (Step  
No.)” to the appropriate step. Use the  
ClickPoint to select “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” and  
make the following settings.  
Note: To simulate the timing nuances of a  
strummed guitar chord, select “Flam.” In  
Program mode, select an acoustic guitar  
program, and choose the user arpeggio pattern  
that you created here. In the Setup page of  
PROG 7: Ed–Arp/ Ctrls, Setup, set “Gate” to  
Step.  
Set the Step 01 “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to +00.  
Set the Step 02 “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to +10.  
Set the Step 03 “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to +00.  
Set the Step 04 “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to +00.  
Set the Step 05 “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to +12.  
Set the Step 07 “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to +00.  
Set the Step 08 “Ptch (Pitch Offset)” to –02.  
Then return to the GLOBAL 5: Arp.Pattern,  
Edit page. For odd-numbered steps, set “Flam”  
to a positive (+) value. For even-numbered  
steps, set “Flam” to a negative (–) value.  
Drum pattern  
You can use the arpeggiator to play a rhythm pat-  
tern by using “Fixed Note” with a drum program.  
1. Select a drum kit program.  
For this example, select preset program B020:  
Standard Kit 1.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Creating a user arpeggio pattern  
2. Select the GLOBAL 5: Arp.Pattern, Setup page,  
4. Input the kick (Tone00).  
and set the parameters.  
Set “Step (Step No.)” to 01, and press the center  
of the ClickPoint. Enter Tone 00. Then set “Step  
(Step No.)” to 05 and enter Tone 0.  
Check “Fixed Note.” If this is checked, tones  
will always sound at the specified pitch.  
If you set “Mode (Fixed Note Mode)” to  
Trigger All Tones, playing a single note will  
cause all Tones to sound. If you set “Mode  
(Fixed Note Mode)” to Trigger As Played, the  
notes you play will determine how Tones are  
sounded.  
5. Input the snare (Tone01).  
Set “Step (Step No.)” to 03, and enter Tone 01.  
Then set “Step (Step No.)” to 07 and enter Tone  
01.  
6. Input the closed hi-hat (Tone02).  
Choose “Step (Step No.)” 01, 02, 03, 05, 06, and  
07, and enter Tone 02 for each of these steps.  
7. Input the open hi-hat (Tone03).  
Set “Step (Step No.)” to 04, and enter Tone 03.  
Then set “Step (Step No.)” to 08, and enter Tone  
03.  
Fixed Note  
Tone No. Fixed Note No.  
Mode(Fixed Note Mode)  
If “Fixed Note” is checked, you will be able to  
set “Tone No.” and “Fixed Note No.”  
Select “Tone No.,” and then set “Fixed Note  
No.” to specify the note number that the tone  
will sound.  
8. Press the [MENU/ OK] button.  
If “Mode (Fixed Note Mode)” is set to Trigger  
All Tones, playing a single note on the  
keyboard will cause the rhythm pattern to play.  
Here, set “Tone No.” and “Fixed Note No.” as  
follows.  
Tone No.  
Fixed Note No.  
C2 (kick)  
If “Mode (Fixed Note Mode)” is set to Trigger  
As Played, playing a single note on the  
keyboard will cause only the kick (Tone00) to  
play. Playing two notes on the keyboard will  
cause only the kick (Tone00) and snare  
(Tone01) to play. In this way, the number of  
keys that you play will be played by the same  
number of tones.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
F2 (snare)  
F#3 (closed hi-hat)  
A#3 (open hi-hat)  
The drumsamples that correspond to each note  
number will differ depending on the drum kit.  
9. Set the parameters for each step.  
After youve used the keyboard to find the  
drum sound you want to use, you can enter  
“Fixed Note No.”  
Use “Vel (Velocity)” etc. to add accents to the  
rhythm pattern.  
Note: The “Gt (Gate)” and “Vel (Velocity)”  
settings you make here will be valid if the  
“Gate” and “Velocity” parameters (PROG 7:  
EdArp/ Ctrls, Setup page) of the program  
selected in Program mode are set to Step.  
3. Access the Edit page.  
Each Tone in the display will be shown as a  
small circle.  
For each horizontal line (Tone) in the display,  
you will specify a drumsample (note number)  
of the drum kit.  
If these parameters have a setting other than  
Step, the “Gt (Gate)” and “Vel (Velocity)” that  
were specified for each individual step will be  
ignored, and all notes of the arpeggio will  
sound according to the specified gate and  
velocity.  
Next we will input a rhythm pattern.  
Note: Before you set “Gate,” move the  
REALTIME CONTROLS C-mode [1] (ARP-  
GATE) knob to the center position (12 oclock).  
Note: Before you set “Velocity,” move the  
REALTIME CONTROLS C-mode [2] (ARP-  
VELOCITY) knob to the center position (12  
oclock).  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Arpeggiator settings  
8. If you wish to save the state of the combination  
at the same time, return to Combination mode  
and write the combination (p.61).  
Dual polyphonic arpeggiator editing  
in Combi and Multi modes  
Here we will use a combination as an example in  
our explanation.  
Note: When editing a user arpeggio pattern,  
pay attention to the global MIDI channel, the  
channel of each track, and the arpeggiator  
assignments, and make sure that the  
arpeggiator you are hearing is the pattern that  
you wish to edit.  
The same procedure applies when editing an  
arpeggio pattern in Multi mode.  
If you have entered this mode from the Combina-  
tion mode, the arpeggio pattern selected by the  
combination will be affected by your editing.  
1. In Combination mode, select a combination  
Assigning a name  
We recommend that you assign a name to the  
arpeggio pattern you create.  
that uses the arpeggio pattern you wish to edit.  
For this example, select a combination to which  
arpeggiators A and B is assigned.  
You can do this by using the “Rename Arpeggio  
Pattern” utility. For details on assigning a name,  
2. Press the [ARP ON/ OFF] button to turn on the  
arpeggiator (the button will light).  
Even if the arpeggiator had been turned off  
when you moved here, you can use the [ARP  
ON/ OFF] button to turn it on. However, if  
“Arpeggiator Run” A or B are not checked, and  
if no timbres have been assigned in “Assign,”  
then the arpeggiator will not operate.  
Saving a user arpeggio  
When youre finished editing, you should save the  
user arpeggio.  
3. Access the GLOBAL 5: Arp.Pattern, Setup  
The “Tempo,” “Pattern,” “Octave,” “Resolution,”  
“Sort,” “Latch,” “Key Sync.,” and “Keyboard” set-  
tings of a user arpeggio pattern are parameters  
that are saved together with the program, combi-  
nation, or multi set. These parameters are not  
saved by the Write operation described here. If  
you want to save these parameters, return to the  
previous mode and write the data.  
page.  
4. If you moved here from Combination mode,  
use the “Arp (Arpeggio Select)” A and B to  
select the arpeggiator that you wish to edit.  
Note: Youll need to turn off the memory protect  
setting for user arpeggio patterns. In the GLOBAL  
0: System, Preference page, uncheck the Memory  
Protect “Arp. UsrPat” box. (p.88)  
If this is A, your editing will apply to the  
parameters and user arpeggio pattern of  
arpeggiator A.  
1. Press the [UTILITY] button to access the utility  
menu, and choose “Write Arpeggio Patterns.”  
If this is B, your editing will apply to the  
parameters and user arpeggio pattern of  
arpeggiator B.  
2. To write (save) your settings, press the  
[MENU/ OK] button.  
5. Switch between arpeggiators A and B, and edit  
A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you  
want to write the arpeggio patterns.  
their respective user arpeggio patterns.  
If you wish to stop one of the arpeggiators,  
return to Combination mode, and in COMBI 0:  
Play, select the Arp. A or the Arp. B page and  
uncheck the “Arpeggiator Run” check box.  
3. Press the [MENU/ OK] button to write your  
settings, or press the [EXIT/ CANCEL] button if  
you decide not to write.  
The arpeggio patterns will be written (saved).  
6. To modify the name of a user arpeggio pattern,  
use the Utility “Rename Arpeggio Pattern”  
7. If you wish to save the edited user arpeggio  
pattern in internal memory, you must write the  
user arpeggio pattern.  
In this case, both user arpeggio patterns will be  
written simultaneously. If you turn off the power  
without writing, the edited contents will be lost.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Synchronizing the arpeggiator  
Synchronization to external MIDI clock  
Synchronizing the arpeggiator  
The note timing of the arpeggiator will differ  
depending on the state of the arpeggiator “Key  
Sync.” check box.  
The arpeggiator will synchronize to the “ꢁ  
(Tempo)” based on the timing of the external  
MIDI clock.  
Synchronization to the MIDI Start mes-  
sage  
If this is checked, the arpeggiator will immedi-  
ately start playing from the beginning from the  
first note-on you play after all the keys had been  
previously released.  
When the arpeggiator is on and operating,  
receiving a MIDI Start message will cause the  
arpeggiator to reset to the beginning of the pat-  
tern. (This has no relation to the “Key Sync.”  
setting.)  
If this is unchecked, the arpeggiator will operate  
in synchronization with the internal or external  
MIDI clock.  
The paragraphs below explain how synchroniza-  
tion occurs when the “Key Sync.” check box is  
unchecked. (However, synchronization with Song  
Start and with the MIDI realtime command Start  
message are exceptions to this.)  
Synchronization between arpeggia-  
tors A and B  
In Combination and Multi mode, two arpeggia-  
tors can operate simultaneously. In this case, if you  
start an arpeggiator (whose “Key Sync.” is  
unchecked) while the other arpeggiator is already  
running, the arpeggiator you started will synchro-  
nize to the “(Tempo)” based on the timing of the  
already-running arpeggiator.  
Note: If “Key Sync.” is checked, A and B will each  
operate on their own timing.  
Synchronization with an external  
sequencer in Program, Combination,  
or Multi modes  
When the microX is the master  
If “(Tempo)” is INT, the arpeggiator will operate  
based on the timing of the internal MIDI clock.  
(Tempo)” will be INT if GLOBAL 1: MIDI  
“MIDI Clock” is Internal. The tempo will also be  
INT if the Auto setting is selected and MIDI clock  
is not being received from an external device.  
When the microX is the slave  
If “(Tempo)” is EXT, the arpeggiator will syn-  
chronize to the MIDI clock and Start messages etc.  
received from the external MIDI sequencer or sim-  
ilar device.  
(Tempo)” will be EXT if GLOBAL 1: MIDI “MIDI  
Clock” is Ext-MIDI or Ext-USB. The tempo will also  
be EXT if the Auto setting is selected and MIDI  
clock is being received from an external device.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Arpeggiator settings  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Drum Kits  
If “Oscillator Mode” is set to “Drums,” youll be  
able to make settings for one drum kit. A drum kit  
does have velocity switch settings, but these set-  
tings are made for the drum kit in Global mode,  
and cannot be edited or saved in Program mode.  
What is a Drum Kit?  
Drum Kits, as the name implies, are optimized for  
creating drum sounds.Drum Kits are created in  
Global Mode. They offer a number of special fea-  
tures, such as:  
Each note can play a different sound  
Before you start editing…  
On each note, you can use up to two Drum  
Samples, with velocity switching  
Each note has separate settings for the most  
important sound parameters, including vol-  
ume, filter cutoff and resonance, envelope  
attack and decay, pitch.  
First, select a Drum Program  
In Global Mode, youll play the kit that youre  
editing as if you were playing it from within the  
Program, Combination, or Multi set which was  
selected before you entered Global mode.  
You can specify the insert effect routing and  
master effect send level for each note. For  
example, you can use this to send just the snare  
to a compressor.  
So, before you enter the GLOBAL 4: DKit pages,  
it’s best to select a Program which is already set up  
for drums in Program mode, with the appropriate  
EG settings, effects, and so on. Choose a drum  
Program such as “B020: Standard Kit 1.”  
You can use Drum Kits only in Programs whose  
“Oscillator Mode” is set to “Drums.”  
If you moved from Multi mode to Global mode,  
playing the keyboard will sound the program and  
arpeggiator of the track that matches the global  
MIDI channel (GLOBAL 1).  
Drum Kit memory structure  
The microX has 49 Drum Kits, divided into Inter-  
nal, User, and GM (General MIDI) groups as  
shown below.  
You can edit or write into any of the locations  
except for the GM bank, which cannot be erased.  
Match the note mapping and key  
position for the drum kit  
In order for the note mappings to match the key-  
board, the Oscillators Octave setting needs to be  
+0 [8']. All Drum Kit Programs should have this  
setting already. If youre unsure, you can check  
this yourself:  
If you want to start with a GM bank drum kit and  
edit it, use the “Copy Drum Kit” utility to select a  
drum kit and copy it to the USER bank.  
Drum Kit banks  
Bank  
INT  
No.  
00…31  
32…39  
40…48  
Contents  
Factory Drum Kits  
1. Access the Program mode PROG 1: Ed–Basic,  
OSC1 page.  
USER  
GM  
User (initialized) Drum Kits  
GM2 Drum Kits  
2. Check that the “Octave” parameter (near the  
top of the page) is set to +0 [8'].  
With a setting other than +0 [8'], the  
relationship between the keys and the Drum  
Kit sound map will be incorrect.  
Drum Kit Programs and Oscillator  
Mode  
The PROG 1: Ed–Basic, Prog Basic page “Oscilla-  
tor Mode” setting specifies whether the oscillator  
will be a drum kit or a conventional multisample  
(such as piano or strings).  
Check the memory protect setting  
When you wish to edit a user drum kit, first turn  
off memory protect by unchecking the Memory  
Protect “Drum Kit” check box in the GLOBAL 0:  
System Preference page.  
You can verify this setting in the PROG 2: Ed–  
Pitch, OSC1 page. If “Oscillator Mode” is set to  
Single, youll be able to specify two multisamples  
and a velocity switch. If this is set to Double,  
youll be able to make an additional set of settings  
in the OSC2 page.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Using Drum Kits  
Saving and comparing data  
Editing Drum Kits  
The edits you make in Global mode will be lost  
when the power is turned off, so you need to  
write (save) your edits if you want to keep  
these changes. Four types of data are handled  
in Global mode: user drumkit settings (GLO-  
BAL 4), arpeggiator settings (GLOBAL 5),  
external control settings (GLOBAL 6), and all  
other global settings (GLOBAL 0–3). You can  
save each type of data into its own memory  
area.  
Basic Editing  
1. Select the Program that you wish to use while  
editing the Drum Kit.  
For more details, see “First, select a Drum  
2. Press the [GLOBAL] button to enter Global  
mode.  
Note that Compare cant be used in Global  
mode. If you want to edit a user drum kit or  
user arpeggio pattern, you should first use  
“Copy Drum Kit” or “Copy Arpeggio Pattern”  
to copy the drum kit or user arpeggio pattern  
you want to edit into a vacant number, and  
then edit the copy.  
3. Access the GLOBAL 4: DKit, High Sample  
page.  
4. Use the “Drum Kit” parameter, at the top of the  
screen, to select the Drum Kit that you wish to  
edit.  
Caution when a drum kit is used by  
more than one program  
When you edit a drum kit, your changes will affect  
all programs that use that same drum kit. If you  
want to edit one of the preloaded drum kits, it is  
best to copy the drum kit into a vacant area of the  
USER bank, and then edit the copy of the drum  
kit.  
5. Use the “Key” parameter to select the note that  
you wish to edit.  
Use the front panel [VALUE] dial etc. to edit the  
setting.  
This “Key” selection applies to all three Drum  
Kit editing tabs.  
6. Use the “Assign” check box to specify whether  
the key will have its own settings, or use the  
same settings as the next higher note.  
If “Assign” is checked, the key will have its  
own settings. This is the default.  
If “Assign” is not checked, the key wont have  
its own settings. Instead, it will use the same  
settings as the next higher note–except that the  
drum samples will be played at a lower pitch.  
The pitch that sounds will depend on the  
PROG 2: Ed–Pitch, OSC1 page “Pitch Slope”  
setting.  
Use this setting when you want only to change  
the pitch, such as with tom or cymbal sounds.  
Placing drum samples  
Heres how to place two drum samples and switch  
between them using velocity.  
1. Access the GLOBAL 4: DKit, High Sample  
page.  
2. Select the High “Drum Sample.”  
Press the [CATEGORY] button to view a list of  
the drum samples organized by category. For  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Editing Drum Kits  
details on how to make a selection, see  
You can also copy settings from one “Key” to  
another, using the “Copy Key Setup” utility  
command.  
3. Select a drum sample name in the list so that it  
is highlighted.  
4. Press the [MENU/ OK] button to confirm the  
Using Exclusive Groups  
1. Access the GLOBAL 4: DKit, Voice/ Mixer  
selection.  
5. Press the [PAGE+] button to access the  
page.  
GLOBAL 4: DKit- Low Sample page.  
2. Use the Excl Group (Exclusive Groups) to make  
one drum sound cut off another drum sound -  
such as closed and open hi-hats.  
6. Specify the Low Drumsample as you did in  
steps 2–4.  
Now you have assigned drum samples to the  
High Drumsample and Low Drumsample.  
Next, well assign the velocity range for these  
drum samples.  
For example, lets say that youve assigned an  
open hi-hat and a closed hi-hat to the same  
exclusive group:  
Play the open hi-hat sound.  
7. Set the “Velocity SW LH”.  
While its still ringing, play the closed hi-hat.  
The Low drum sample will sound when you  
play a key less strongly than the specified  
velocity value, and the High drum sample will  
sound when you play more strongly.  
The open hi-hat sound will be cut off–simulat-  
ing the action of a physical hi-hat.  
For example if you set “Velocity SW LH” to  
100, the drum sample assigned to “Low” will  
sound when you play the keyboard softly, and  
the multisample assigned to “High” will sound  
when you play strongly.  
Using Hold  
The Program Hold parameter can be especially  
useful for drum programs, since it lets the samples  
ring out naturally regardless of how long you hold  
down the note. The way that this works depends  
on settings in both the Program and the Drum Kit,  
as described below.  
Note: If you dont want to use this function, set  
Velocity SW LH” to 001. Only the High  
drum sample will sound.  
To enable Hold:  
Note: This is the same type of function as  
velocity multisample switching in a program.  
1. Access the PROG 1: Ed–Basic, Prog Basic page.  
2. Voice Assign, make sure that the “Hold” check  
box is checked.  
Once youve turned on “Hold” for the  
Program, the function is controlled on a note-  
by-note basis according to settings within the  
Drum Kit.  
Fine-tuning the sound of each sam-  
ple  
1. If you like, adjust the Levels for the two Drum  
3. Access the GLOBAL 4: DKit, Voice/ Mixer  
Samples.  
page.  
Set the High and Low “Level” settings to adjust  
the volume balance.  
2. Set the tuning and EG parameters as desired.  
For each Drum Sample, you can control offsets  
to the Programs settings for transposition,  
tuning, and EG attack and decay times.  
4. For each key, set the Enable Note Off Receive  
3. You can adjust the sound or specify reverse  
parameter as desired.  
playback for each drum sample.  
If this check box is unchecked, the key will be  
held. If it is checked, the key will not be held.  
For each drum sample, set the “FC (Filter  
Cutoff)” and “Reso (Resonance)” parameters,  
and specify “S.Ofs” and “Rev (Reverse).” (PG  
p.87)  
If you turn off “Hold” in the Program, no keys  
will be held - regardless of their “Enable Note  
Off Receive” setting.  
4. Repeat steps 1–3 to set up each key of the Drum  
Kit.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Drum Kits  
Controlling effects for each key  
A drum kit lets you set the insert effect and master  
effect send for each key.  
Saving a drum kit  
When youve finished editing your drum kit, you  
can save it.  
1. Access the PROG 8: Ed–InsertFX, BUS page.  
Note: Youll need to turn off the memory protect  
setting for drum kits. In the GLOBAL 0: System,  
Preference page, uncheck the Memory Protect  
“Drum Kit” check box. (p.88)  
2. Make sure that the “Use DKit Setting” check  
box is checked.  
When “Use DKit Setting” is checked, the  
Program will use the “BUS Select” and Effects  
Send settings for each key of the Drum Kit.  
1. Press the [UTILITY] button to access the utility  
menu, and choose “Write Drum Kits.”  
When “Use DKit Setting” is unchecked, the  
Program will ignore the Drum Kits BUS  
Select” and Effects Send settings.  
2. Press the [MENU/ OK] button to write the  
drum kit data.  
A dialog box will ask you for confirmation.  
3. Access the GLOBAL 4: DKit, Voice/ Mixer  
3. Press the [MENU/ OK] button to save, or press  
the [EXIT/ CANCEL] button if you decide not  
to save.  
page.  
4. Use the “BUS Select” parameter to send drum  
sounds through their own Insert effect, or to the  
individual outputs.  
The drum kit data will be written (saved).  
If you like, you can send each note to its own  
Insert effect, or to the individual audio outputs,  
in addition to the main L/ R outputs.  
For example, you might send all snare sounds  
to IFX, and the remaining sounds to L/R.  
5. Use “Send1(MFX1)” and “Send2(MFX2)” to set  
the send levels to the master effects.  
Setting the pan for each key  
To use separate pan settings for each key:  
1. Access the PROG 5: Ed–Amp1/ 2, Level/ Pan  
page.  
2. Under Pan, make sure that the “Use DKit  
Setting” check box is checked.  
When “Use DKit Setting” is checked, the  
Program will use the pan settings for each key  
of the Drum Kit.  
3. Access the GLOBAL 4: DKit, Voice/ Mixer  
page.  
4. Use the “Pan” parameter to specify the keys  
stereo output position.  
Assigning a name  
We recommend that you assign a name to the  
Drum Kit you create.  
You can do this by using the “Rename Drum Kit”  
utility. For details on assigning a name, see p.114.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
External control settings  
The microX’s external control function lets you  
The 0: Play, Ext.Control page will appear.  
use the four REALTIME CONTROLS knobs to  
control an external MIDI device. You can specify  
the MIDI channel and MIDI control change that  
each knob will transmit.  
One set of control settings consists of twelve such  
assignments (four knobs × three groups), and  
there are a total of 64 sets.  
3. Choose “Setup Select,” and select the external  
control set that you want to use.  
With the factory settings, the control sets contain  
preloaded data. For example, there are setups that  
let you control soft synthesizers such as the KORG  
Legacy Collection, and other setups that let you  
control the level and pan of a DAW (Digital Audio  
Workstation) program in realtime.  
The set list is shown in the lower lines. The  
functions of the currently-enabled knobs are  
highlighted.  
4. Press the [SELECT] button to select the  
functions (group) that will be controlled by the  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1]–[4] knobs.  
See the “microX External Control Template List”  
(PDF) for details on the control change (CC#) set-  
tings assigned by the preloaded external control  
templates and the application settings to which  
they correspond.  
5. When you turn knobs [1]–[4], the assigned  
MIDI control change (CC#) will be transmitted  
on the assigned MIDI channel.  
Note: The microX’s keyboard and other  
controllers will operate as usual.  
6. Enter Combination or Multi mode, and operate  
the knobs.  
Using external controls  
The External Control function lets you use the  
REALTIME CONTROLS [1]–[4] knobs as  
independent controllers in any mode.  
Selecting external controls  
If the [EXT. CONTROLLER] button is on,  
changing programs in Program mode or  
switching to Combination mode etc. will not  
affect the control set. This means you can select  
another sound on the microX without changing  
the way youre controlling an external MIDI  
device, or conversely you can change the way  
youre controlling an external MIDI device  
without switching sounds on the microX.  
Note: Before you continue, adjust your settings so  
that the microX can send MIDI data to your  
computer application or MIDI device.  
1. Press a PROGRAM [A]–[GM] button. (The  
button will light.)  
We’ve selected Program mode as an example  
here, but you are free to select Combination or  
Multi mode if you wish.  
2. Press the [EXT. CONTROLLER] button. (The  
button will light.)  
[EXT. CONTROLLER] button  
[SELECT] button:A/B/C  
Knobs [1]–[4]  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
External control settings  
External control setups  
You will use Global mode to create external con-  
Saving an external control  
setup  
When youve finished editing, save your external  
control setup.  
trol setups.  
The content that you edit in Global mode is  
preserved until you turn off the power, but will  
be lost when the power is turned off. There are  
four types of data that you manage in Global  
mode; user drum kit settings (GLOBAL 4), user  
arpeggio patterns (GLOBAL5), external control  
settings (GLOBAL 6), and all other global set-  
tings (GLOBAL 0–3). You can write each of  
these into its own memory area.  
Note: Youll need to turn off external control  
memory protect. In the GLOBAL 0: System,  
Preference page, uncheck the Memory Protect  
“Ext. Control” item. (p.88)  
1. Press the [UTILITY] button to access the utility  
menu, and choose “Write Ext. Control Setup.”  
2. To write (save) your settings, press the  
[MENU/ OK] button.  
A dialog box will ask you to confirm that you  
want to write the settings.  
Selecting an external control setup  
and assigning control changes  
3. Press the [MENU/ OK] button to write your  
settings, or press the [EXIT/ CANCEL] button if  
you decide not to write your settings.  
1. Press the [GLOBAL] button to enter Global  
mode.  
2. Access the GLOBAL 6: Ext.Control, Knob A  
page.  
3. Use “Setup Select” to select the external control  
set that you want to edit.  
4. Use Knob 1-A “MIDI Channel” to select the  
MIDI channel on which you want to transmit  
the message.  
Next, use Knob 1-A “CC Assign” to specify the  
MIDI control change (CC#) that you want to  
transmit.  
These two settings determine the CC# and  
MIDI channel of the message that is  
transmitted when (in Program mode etc.) you  
select this external control setup, use the  
[SELECT] button to select group A, and operate  
knob [1].  
5. Next make settings for Knob 2-A through Knob  
4-A, and then use the [SELECT] button to select  
groups B and C, and specify the channel and  
message transmitted by Knob 1-B–Knob 4-B  
and Knob 1-C–Knob 4-C.  
Assigning a name  
It’s a good idea to name any external control set-  
ups that you create so that you can remember its  
purpose.  
Use the “Rename Ext. Control Setup” utility to  
assign a name. For more details, see page 124.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Other functions  
Loading individual banks or data  
items  
The microX allows you to load individual banks,  
programs, or combinations. Multi set, drum kits,  
arpeggio patterns and external controls can also be  
loaded individually or as a group.  
Restoring the factory set-  
tings (Loading the preloaded  
data)  
If desired, you can restore the microX’s programs,  
combinations, multi sets and Global mode settings  
to their factory-set state. You can do this by reload-  
ing the preloaded data.  
This is convenient when you want to restore just  
one item from the factory preload data, or when  
you want to rearrange combinations in a specific  
order for live performance.  
This operation will rewrite any data that had  
been previously written to the internal  
memory. If you dont want to lose this data,  
you should save it using the included  
“microX Editor/ Plug-In Editor”; or save the  
data using a commercially available data filer.  
When rearranging programs, you need to be  
aware that if you write them to another bank  
or number, any combination that had used the  
program formerly occupying the writing  
destination will sound differently.  
1. Press the [GLOBAL] button to enter Global  
For example if you want to load combination  
A000 into C127, proceed as follows.  
mode. (The button will light.)  
2. Press the [EXIT] button.  
1. Access the dialog box as described in steps 1–4,  
You will be in the GLOBAL 0: System page.  
above.  
3. Press the [UTILITY] button to access the Utility  
menu.  
4. Use the ClickPoint [] to select “Load Preload  
Data,” and press the center.  
A dialog box will appear.  
2. Choose “Kind,” and use the [VALUE] dial etc.  
to select Combination.  
3. Use the ClickPoint [] to move down, and use  
the [VALUE] dial to select Single.  
4. In the same way, select combination A000 as the  
5. Choose “Kind,” and use the [VALUE] dial to  
copy-source.  
select the data that you want to load.  
5. In the same way, select combination C127 as the  
Choose All if you want to restore all settings to  
the factory-set state. If you execute this with the  
“All” setting, all programs, combinations, multi  
sets, drum kits, arpeggio patterns, global  
settings, and external control sets will be  
loaded.  
load-destination (“To”).  
6. Press the [MENU/ OK] button.  
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the  
operation.  
7. Press the [MENU/ OK] button once again.  
6. Press the [MENU/ OK] button.  
The data will be loaded, and the preloaded  
combination A000 will be copied into C127.  
A dialog box will ask you to confirm the  
operation.  
7. Press the [MENU/ OK] button once again.  
All preloaded data will be loaded.  
If the “Memory Protected” dialog box  
appears, un-check the memory protect  
setting, and perform the load operation once  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Other functions  
You can enter text using just the ClickPoint.  
Assigning a name (Rename)  
You can modify the name of any program, combi-  
When you press the ClickPoint center, the  
square-framed cursor in the text box will  
change.  
nation, multi set, category, arpeggio pattern, etc.  
Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select a  
character. Press the center once again to finalize  
the selection.  
The following table shows the items that you can  
rename, and the corresponding page.  
Item to rename  
Program name  
Page  
Use the ClickPoint [®] to select the next  
character, and enter it in the same way.  
PROG 0...9 Utility:Write Program  
COMBI 0...9 Utility:Write  
Combination  
Combination name  
The function buttons shown in the lower line  
perform the following operations. Use the  
ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select a function,  
and press the center to execute it.  
Multi set name  
Track name  
MULTI 0-1 Utility:Rename Track  
MULTI 0...9 Utility:Write Multi  
GLOBAL 4 Utility:Rename Drum  
Kit  
Clear: Erase all text.  
Drum kit name  
Del (Delete): Delete the character at the cursor  
location.  
GLOBAL 5 Utility:Rename  
Arpeggio Pattern  
Arpeggio pattern name  
Ins (Insert): Insert a space at the cursor  
location.  
External control set  
name  
GLOBAL 5 Utility:Rename  
Ext.Control Setup  
Cap. (Capital): Switch between uppercase and  
Program category name GLOBAL 3:TEXT  
lowercase letters.  
Combination category  
GLOBAL 3:TEXT  
name  
4. Enter the remaining characters as described in  
step 3.  
1. Use the ClickPoint to select the text button ( ),  
5. Press the [MENU/ OK] button.  
and press the center to open the text dialog box.  
If you opened the text dialog box from the  
utility dialog box in step 1, you will return to  
the previous dialog box. In that dialog box,  
press the [MENU/ OK] button (twice) to  
execute the Rename operation.  
See the table above for the appropriate page.  
Note: In a utility menu command, select the text  
button ( ) in the dialog box that appears.  
In GLOBAL 3, select the text button ( ) in the  
page.  
If you opened the text dialog box from the  
GLOBAL 3 page in step 1, the Rename  
operation will be executed.  
The text dialog box will appear.  
For example to enter the text shown in the  
illustration, you would proceed as follows.  
2. Use the ClickPoint [][®][π][] to select  
“Clear.”  
All text will be erased from the text box.  
3. Enter “A”.  
Use the [VALUE] dial to select “A”.  
Press the ClickPoint [®]. The cursor will move.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Assigning functions to REALTIME CONTROLS B-mode knobs [1]–[4]  
Assigning functions to REAL-  
Tap tempo control  
TIME CONTROLS B-mode  
knobs [1]–[4]  
Heres how you can assign functions to REAL-  
TIME CONTROLS B-mode knobs [1]–[4].  
A tap tempo control function is available in Pro-  
gram, Combination, and Multi modes.  
In each mode while the arpeggiator is playing,  
you can press the foot switch (when “Foot SW  
Assign” is set to Tap Tempo p.88) several times  
at the desired tempo to control the playback  
tempo in realtime.  
The functions of these knobs in B-mode can be  
separately assigned for each program, combina-  
tion, and multi set.  
This function is convenient when you want to  
match the playback tempo of the arpeggiator play-  
back to another beat in real-time.  
You will make these settings in “Knob B Assign”  
in the following pages.  
The Tap tempo feature also provides real-time  
control over any BPM or tempo based effects.  
Mode  
Program  
Page  
PROG 7:EdArp/Ctrls, Controls  
COMBI 7:EdArp/Ctrls, Controls  
MULTI 7:Arp/Ctrls, Controls  
The following example shows the procedure for  
using Tap tempo in Program mode.  
Combination  
Multi  
1. In Program mode, select a drum program.  
You may find it convenient to choose from the  
Drum category.  
The default assignments for knobs 1–4 are  
Knob Mod.1 (CC#17), Knob Mod.2 (CC#19),  
Knob Mod.3 (CC#20), and Knob Mod.4  
(CC#21), respectively. For a complete list of the  
possible assignments, see “Knobs 1…4 B  
Assign” (PG p.162).  
2. In the PROG 0: Play, select the Arp. Play page  
and check the “Latch” check box.  
3. Turn on the front panel [ARP ON/ OFF] button.  
4. Press the foot switch (when “Foot SW Assign”  
is set to Tap Tempo) several times at the desired  
tempo. The tempo “=” indication in the upper  
right of the display will change according to the  
playback tempo.  
Heres an example of how to set up knob [1] to  
control a Programs lter and amp EG attack time:  
1. Press the [PROG] button to enter Program  
mode.  
When you play the keyboard, the arpeggiator  
will play a drum pattern at the specified tempo.  
2. Access PROG 7: Ed–Arp/ Ctrls, Controls.  
Press the [MENU/ OK] button, use the  
ClickPoint to select “Arp/ Controls,” and then  
press the center.  
5. Lightly press the foot switch on the beat, and  
slightly shorten the intervals at which you  
press the button.  
3. Choose Knob 1-B “Knob B Assign,” and use the  
The playback tempo of the drum pattern will  
speed up slightly.  
[VALUE] dial etc. to select F/ A Attack (CC#73).  
4. Press the REALTIME CONTROLS [SELECT]  
button to select B-mode, and turn knob [1] to  
control the EG attack for the filter and amp.  
Note: Tap tempo control can be used whenever the  
[TEMPO] knob can be operated.  
Note: If you wish to keep these settings after the  
power is turned off, you must save the Program,  
Combination, or Multi set.  
Adjusting the display con-  
trast  
You can change the display contrast by adjusting  
the GLOBAL 0: System, Preference page “LCD  
Contrast” setting.  
Note: If you wish to keep these settings after the  
power is turned off, you must save the Global  
mode.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Other functions  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Saving data  
Modes and pages in which you can write  
data  
You can write the following items of data in the  
corresponding pages.  
Types of data that can be  
saved  
You can save data in the following ways.  
Writable items  
Programs  
Page  
Write the data into the microX  
PROG 0...9 Utility:Write Program  
COMBI 0...9 Utility:Write Combination  
MULTI 0...9 Utility:Write Multi  
Save the data using the included “microX Edi-  
tor/ Plug-In Editor” software  
Combinations  
Multi sets  
Send a MIDI data dump to a MIDI data filer or  
similar device  
Global settings GLOBAL 0...3 Utility:Write Global Setting  
Drum kits  
GLOBAL 4 Utility:Write Drum Kits  
Arpeggio  
patterns  
GLOBAL 5 Utility:Write Arpeggio Patterns  
Writing data into the microX  
External control  
sets  
GLOBAL 6 Utility:Write Ext.Control Setups  
Data areas that you can write  
You can write data into the following data areas.  
For the procedure, see the page given.  
MIDI data dump  
Programs  
You can save data by transmitting it as MIDI  
exclusive data to a connected MIDI data filer, com-  
puter, or to a second microX unit. (PG p.83)  
Programs 0–127 in banks A–E p.45  
Combinations  
Combinations 0–127 in banks A–C p.61  
The following data can be transmitted via MIDI  
data dump to an external data filer or similar  
device.  
Multi sets 000–127 p.75  
Global settings (pages 0–3) p.87  
Drum kit 00 (INT)–40 (User) p.110  
Arpeggio patterns U000–U250 p.104  
External control sets 00–63 p.112  
Programs, combinations, multi sets, global set-  
tings, user drum kits, user arpeggio patterns,  
external control sets  
You cant write to the following data areas.  
Using the “microX Editor/Plug-In Edi-  
tor”control plug-in software to save  
data  
You can use the “microX Editor/ Plug-In Editor”  
control plug-in to save microX data. For more  
details, see “Editor/ Plug-In Editor Manual”  
(PDF).  
Program banks G: 001–128, g(d): 001–128  
Preset drum kits 40 (GM)–48 (GM)  
Preset arpeggio patterns  
Preset-0 – Preset-4  
Program audition riffs 000–383  
When the microX is shipped, the writable areas  
already contain data. This data is referred to as the  
“preloaded data.” The preloaded data is also  
stored inside the microX, and can be reloaded  
using the “Load Preload Data” operation  
The non-writable areas contain preset data. This  
data cannot be rewritten.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Appendices  
Memory in Global mode  
About the Edit Buffer  
When the power is turned on, the Global mode  
data is called from internal memory into the Glo-  
bal mode memory area. Then when you modify  
the parameters in Global mode, the data in the  
memory area will be modified. If you wish to save  
this modified data in the internal memory, you  
must first Write (save) it.  
About the memory in Program, Com-  
bination, and Multi modes  
When you select a program, combination, or multi  
set in PROG 0: Play, COMBI 0: Play, and MULTI 0:  
Play, the data of the selected program, combina-  
tion, or multi set is called into the microX’s edit  
buffer.  
When you write, the data in the memory area will  
be written into the global settings, drum kits  
arpeggio patterns, and external control sets of  
internal memory.  
When you edit the parameters in pages such as 0:  
Play, your editing will modify the data in the edit  
buffer.  
If you turn off the power without writing, the  
modified data in the memory area will be lost.  
If you wish to save this modified data into internal  
memory, you must perform the Write operation.  
Editing will affect the data that has been  
called into the memory area.  
Edit  
When you perform the Write operation, the data  
in the edit buffer is written to the specified pro-  
gram number, combination number or Multi set  
number of the specified bank.  
Memory Area  
When you write, the  
When the power is turned  
on, the settings are called  
into the memory area.  
various Global mode  
settings will be saved  
in internal memory.  
Write  
Power On  
Internal Memory  
If you select another program, combination or  
Multi set number without writing, the data of the  
newly selected program, combination or multi set  
number will be called into the edit buffer, and  
your changes will be lost.  
Arpeggio  
Patterns  
External  
Control Sets  
Global Setting  
Drum Kits  
When you press the [COMPARE] button in these  
modes, the data in memory (i.e., the written con-  
tent) is temporarily called into the edit buffer. This  
lets you compare the settings being edited with  
the settings prior to editing.  
Editing applies to the data in the edit  
buffer. Programs or combinations will play  
according to the data in the edit buffer.  
Edit  
Edit Buffer  
When you write,the program  
or combination settings will  
be saved in internal memory.  
When you select a program or  
combination, its data is called  
from internal memory into the  
edit buffer.  
Write  
Select  
Internal Memory  
Program  
Combination  
Multi  
Bank A 0...127  
Bank A 0...127  
0...127  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
If you experience problems, see the relevant item  
and take the appropriate measures.  
The power is turned on, but the display  
does not display normally, or an error  
message is displayed.There is no sound  
when you play the keyboard, and the  
microX does not function normally.  
Power supply  
This type of problem may occur if a data writ-  
ing operation to internal memory was not com-  
pleted correctly, for example if the power of the  
microX was turned off while a program or  
other data was being written. If this occurs, use  
the following procedure to initialize the  
microX’s internal memory.  
Power does not turn on  
Is the AC adapter connected to an outlet?  
Is the Power switch turned on?  
Turn on the rear panel Power switch. p.23  
1. Turn off the power.  
Display  
2. Hold down the [ENTER] button and the [0]  
button, and turn on the power.  
The power is turned on, but nothing is  
shown in the display.  
The microX functions normally when you  
play the keyboard or perform other oper-  
ations.  
The microX will be initialized, and the factory  
preload data will be written into internal  
memory. While the data is being written, the  
display will indicate “Now writing into  
internal memory.”  
Due to changes in the surrounding tempera-  
ture, the display may on rare occasions be diffi-  
cult or impossible to read. If this occurs,  
perform the following procedure.  
Audio output  
No sound  
1. While holding down the [EXIT/ CANCEL]  
button, press the [UTILITY] button. The  
[GLOBAL] button will blink, and the Global  
mode Update Global Setting dialog box will  
appear.  
Are connections made correctly to your amp,  
mixer, or headphones?  
Is your amp or mixer turned on?  
Is Local Control turned on?  
If you are unable to read the display, or if the  
Update Global Setting dialog box does not  
appear, check whether the [GLOBAL] button  
is blinking. If the [GLOBAL] button is lit or  
dark, the microX may be writing data that  
was received from an external connected  
MIDI device, or may be responding to a  
request for output. If so, make sure that the  
microX is not writing data from an external  
connected MIDI device or transmitting data  
in response to a request, or that any such  
operation has been completed. Then turn the  
power of the microX off and on again, and  
repeat this procedure from step 1.  
In GLOBAL 1: MIDI, check the “Local Control  
On” check box. PG p.82  
Is the [VOLUME] knob raised? p.12  
If there is no sound from the INDIVIDUAL  
OUTPUT 1, 2 jacks, make sure that “BUS  
Select” or “BUS Select” following the insert  
effect is set to 1, 2, 1/ 2. p.81  
If specific tracks in Multi mode do not  
sound, Make sure that the “PLAY/ MUTE” is  
set to PLAY. p.70  
Make sure that the “Status” is INT or BTH.  
Are the “Key Zone” and “Velocity Zone” set so  
that sound will be produced when you play?  
2. Use the [VALUE] dial to adjust the LCD  
contrast.  
3. Press the [MENU/ OK] button.  
The LCD contrast setting will be memorized.  
Notes do not stop  
Note: Other global settings will also be memorized  
at this time.  
In PROG 1: EdBasic, select the Prog Basic  
page, make sure that the “Hold” check box is  
unchecked. PG p.6  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendices  
In GLOBAL 0: System, Foot page, make sure  
that “Damper Polarity” or “Foot SW Polarity”  
is set correctly. PG p.80  
Effects  
Effects are not applied  
Are the Effect Global SW IFX Off, MFX1 Off,  
or MFX2 Off (GLOBAL 0: System, Basic page)  
settings checked? p.87  
Noise or oscillation is heard  
When using the BPM/ MIDI Sync. function to  
control the delay time of an effect, noise may  
occur in the delay sound. This noise is due to  
discontinuities in the delay sound, and is not a  
malfunction.  
If you are in Combination, and Multi mode,  
and master effects are not applied when you  
raise the S1(Send1(MFX1)) or S2(Send2(MFX2))  
of the timbre/ track, does Rtn1(Return 1) or  
Rtn2(Return 2) from the master effect need to  
be raised? p.83  
Some effects, such as 015: St.AnalogRecd, gen-  
erate noise intentionally. It is also possible to  
create oscillation using a filter with resonance.  
These are not malfunctions.  
Alternatively, has Send 1 or Send 2 for each  
oscillator of the program used by the timbre/  
track been lowered? p.84  
Programs and Combinations  
The actual send level is determined by  
multiplying the send setting of each oscillator  
in the program with the send setting of the  
timbre/ track.  
Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed  
Make sure that the PROG 1: Ed–Basic, Prog  
Basic page “Mode (Oscillator Mode)” parame-  
ter is set to Double.  
Arpeggiator  
A combination does not play correctly  
after you load data  
Arpeggiator does not start  
Is the [ARP ON/ OFF] button turned on (lit)?  
Are the bank/ numbers of the programs used  
by the combination the same as when the com-  
bination was created?  
If the arpeggiator does not start for a combina-  
tion or Multi set, make sure that “Arpeggiator  
Run” is checked, and that an arpeggiator is  
selected for “Assign.” p.96  
If you have switched program banks, you can  
use the Change all bank references menu com-  
mand to change the program bank for each tim-  
bre of a combination. PG p.77  
Is the GLOBAL 1: MIDI “MIDI Clock” parame-  
ter set to Internal? PG p.81  
Multi set  
Drum Kits  
When you loaded data, a Multi set does  
not sound correctly  
The drum samples pitch does not change  
You have left the “Assign” check box  
unchecked, and want to play the drum sample  
at the adjacent right a semitone lower, but the  
pitch does not change.  
Are the bank/ number of the programs used by  
the song the same as when the Multi set was  
created?  
If you have selected a drum program in Pro-  
gram mode, and then want to edit the drum kit  
in Global mode, go to the PROG 2: Ed–Pitch,  
OSC1 page and set “Pitch Slope” to +1.0 before  
you enter Global mode.  
A combination copied using “Copy From  
Combi”sounds different than it did in  
Combination mode  
Did you make the correct settings in the Copy  
From Combination dialog box? p.72  
In the Copy From Combination dialog box,  
check the “Auto adjust Arpeggio setting” box  
before you execute the copy.  
Audition  
No sound when the [AUDITION] button is  
turned on  
The Audition function is available only in Pro-  
gram mode.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
If no sound is played when you turn on the  
[AUDITION] button in Program mode, make  
sure that the PROG 1: Ed–Basic, Audition page  
parameter “Audition Riff” has not been turned  
Off. PG p.9  
Are you attempting to install from a network  
CD drive?  
This software cannot be installed from a net-  
work-connected CD drive.  
Are you able to use USB?  
If you are using Windows XP, go to [Control  
Panel] [System], and select the [Hardware]  
tab. In [Device Manager], check the settings for  
Universal Serial Bus Controller and USB Root  
Hub.  
MIDI, USB  
This instrument does not respond to  
incoming MIDI data  
Has the microX been detected as an unknown  
device?  
Are all MIDI cables connected correctly?  
If you are using Windows XP, go to [Control  
Panel] [System], select the [Hardware] tab,  
and check [Device Manager]. If the microX has  
not been detected correctly, it will be displayed  
in “Other devices” or “Unknown devices.”  
Reconnect the USB cable; if the microX is again  
displayed as an “Unknown device,” the com-  
puter has failed to detect it correctly. Delete the  
“Unknown device” entry, and reinstall the  
driver. p.28  
Is the MIDI data being received on the channel  
on which it is being transmitted? PG p.81  
This instrument does not respond cor-  
rectly to incoming MIDI data  
Are the GLOBAL 1: MIDI page MIDI Filter set-  
tings “Enable Program Change,” “Bank,”  
“Combi,” “Ctrl Change,” “AfterT,” and “Exelu-  
sire” each checked? PG p.82  
If you wish to receive MIDI exclusive mes-  
sages, is the GLOBAL 1: MIDI page MIDI Filter  
“Exclusive” box checked? p.33  
Your software does not respond to the  
microX  
Does this instrument support the types of mes-  
sages that are being sent to it?  
Is the USB cable connected correctly?  
Did you install the driver?  
Has your computer detected the connected  
microX?  
When using USB, sound processing is  
slow, or the tempo is unstable  
If you are using Windows XP, go to Control  
Panel “Sounds and Audio Devices Proper-  
ties” and click the Hardware tab.  
Is the MIDI driver installed for the USB port  
youve connected?  
The driver must be installed for each USB port  
you use. If you connect the microX to a USB  
port other than the port you used when install-  
ing the KORG USB-MIDI Driver for Windows  
XP, youll need to reinstall the KORG USB-  
MIDI Driver.  
If you are using Mac OS X, go to Macintosh HD  
Application folder Utility folder →  
“Audio MIDI Settings,” select the “MIDI  
Devices” tab, and check that the microX has  
been detected.  
Some computers may not recognize the microX  
Have you made the correct “echo back” setting  
on your computer and the correct Local Control  
setting on the microX?  
because of their hardware configuration.  
Check the microX’s assignments and USB-  
MIDI port settings.  
The connected device or software may not sup-  
port the messages you are transmitting. See the  
owners manual of the connected device or  
software to verify that it responds to the mes-  
sages you are transmitting.  
Included CD-ROM  
Cant install the driver included CD-ROM  
Is the USB cable connected correctly?  
Is the CD-ROM inserted in your CD drive?  
Software does not operate correctly  
Make sure that the CD-ROM is inserted cor-  
Does your computer meet the operating  
requirements of the software?  
rectly.  
Could the lens of your CD drive be dirty?  
Even if your computer meets the requirements,  
there may be cases in which the software does  
not operate correctly because of the computer  
you are using.  
Use a commercially-available lens cleaner to  
clean the lens.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Specifications and options  
Specifications  
Operating temperature +0 – +40 °C (do not allow condensation)  
System  
HI (Hyper Integrated) Synthesis System  
25 key  
Keyboard  
Synthesis types  
Maximum polyphony  
Waveform memory  
Oscillator  
HI (Hyper Integrated) Synthesis System  
Single mode  
Double mode  
62 voices (62 oscillators)  
31 voices (62 oscillators)  
Sound Engine  
Programs  
64 Mbyte PCM ROM ( 642 multisamples, 929 drumsamples)  
Single = OSC1 only; Double = OSC1 & OSC2  
Two-level velocity switching per oscillator  
Filters  
24 dB/octave LPF with resonance, 12 dB/octave LPF + HPF  
Two envelope generators (Filter & Amp), two LFOs, and two key tracking  
generators (Filter & Amp) for each voice  
Modulation  
In addition, pitch EG and alternate modulation (AMS) functions  
Number of timbres,  
master keyboard  
functionality  
Maximum 8 timbres, key and velocity splits/layers/crossfading,Tone Adjust  
function allows program settings to be modified, control from external MIDI  
devices  
Combinations  
Maximum 16 tracks, key and velocity splits/layers/crossfading,Tone Adjust  
function allows program settings to be modified, control from external MIDI  
devices  
Number of tracks, master  
keyboard functionality  
Multi sets  
Drum Kits  
Drum sample assignments, two-level velocity switching available  
User combinations  
User programs  
Multi sets  
384 combinations/384 preloaded  
The number of  
-Combinations  
-Programs  
-Multi sets  
-Drum Kits  
640 programs/640 preloaded  
128 multi sets/16 preloaded  
User Drum Kits  
Preset Programs  
Insert Effect  
40 Drum Kits/32 preloaded  
128 GM preset programs + nine GM2 preset drum programs  
1 insert effect (stereo in/out)  
Master Effects  
Master EQ  
2 master effects (mono in/stereo out)  
1 master EQ (3-band stereo)  
Effects  
Effect types  
89 effect types (available for insert effects or master effects)  
Effect dynamic modulation function (Dmod)  
Modulation  
Dual polyphonic  
arpeggiators  
Program mode: one arpeggiator  
Combination and Multi modes:two arpeggiators  
Tempo  
40–240  
Arpeggiators  
Number of arpeggio  
patterns  
5 preset, 251 user/251 preloaded  
ON/OFF, REALTIME CONTROLS C-mode knobs [1]–[4]  
Controllers  
JOYSTICK, OCTAVE [][π]  
KNOBS  
[1]–[4]  
A, B, C  
REALTIME CONTROLS  
Arpeggiator  
SELECT  
Controllers  
ARP ON/OFF  
64 set (1 set = 12 control  
External control  
REALTIME CONTROLS KNOBS [1]–[4], [SELECT] A, B, C  
Graphical user interface:240 x 64 pixel LCD display  
Buttons = [COMBI], [PROG], [GLOBAL], [MULTI]  
Buttons = [PAGE+][PAGE], [EXIT], [MENU]  
Display  
Mode  
Pages  
VALUE Controllers  
VALUE select  
UTILITY  
BANK  
Dial = [VALUE], (ClickPoint)  
ClickPoint [][®][π][] center, Buttons = [OK], [CANCEL]  
Button = [UTILITY]  
User Interface  
Buttons = PROGRAM [A]–[GM], COMBINATION [A]–[C]  
Knob = PREALTIME CONTROLS C [4]  
TEMPO  
CATEGORY  
Other  
Buttons = [CATEGORY], ([CATEGORY], PROGRAM [A]–[GM],COMBINATION [A]–[C])  
Buttons = [COMPARE], [AUDITION], Knob = [VOLUME]  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operating requirements for connection to a computer  
Audio Outputs  
1/4" phone jacks (unbalanced);[VOLUME] slider controls only the MAIN OUT L/  
MONO and R jacks  
MAIN OUTPUTS  
L/MONO, R  
Output impedance  
Maximum Level  
Load impedance  
1.1kstereo (L/MONO is 550for mono)  
L/MONO, R:+12.0 dBu  
(INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT)1, 2:+11.6 dBu  
INDIVIDUAL OUTPUTS 1, 2  
100 kor greater  
Analog  
1/8" mini-stereo phone jack;volume controlled by [VOLUME] slider (linked  
with MAIN OUTPUT L/Mono)  
Output Impedance  
Maximum Level  
Load impedance  
33Ω  
36 mW  
Headphones  
33Ω  
DAMPER (half-damper supported)  
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH, ASSIGNABLE PEDAL  
IN, OUT  
Control Inputs  
MIDI  
USB  
USB B  
Power  
DC power inlet, switch  
Dimensions  
(W × D × H)  
Weight  
606 × 226 × 80 (mm)  
2.4 kg  
Power supply  
voltage  
DC 12V  
Power Consumption 10W  
AC adapter, Operation guide, CD-ROM (microX Editor/Plug-In Editor, KORG USB-MIDI driver, Parameter  
guide, External Control Template)  
Accessories  
Operating requirements for connection to a computer  
KORG USB-MIDI Driver operating requirements  
Computer  
A computer with a USB port, that satisfies the requirements of Microsoft Windows XP  
Windows  
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition,Professional or x64 Edition (The driver for x64 Edition  
is a Beta version)  
Operating system  
Computer  
An Apple Macintosh with a USB port that satisfies the requirements of Mac OS X  
Mac OS X version 10.3 or later  
Macintosh  
Operating system  
microX Editor/Plug-In Editor operating requirements  
CPU:Pentium III/1 GHz or better  
Memory:256 MB or more  
Monitor:1,024 × 768 pixels, 16-bit color or better  
A computer with a USB port, that satisfies the requirements of Microsoft Windows XP  
Computer  
Windows  
Operating system  
Computer  
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition or Professional, Service Pack 1 or later  
CPU:Apple G4/400 MHz or better  
Memory:256 MB or more  
Monitor:1,024 × 768 pixels, 32,000 colors or better  
An Apple Macintosh with a USB port that satisfies the requirements of Mac OS X  
Macintosh  
Operating system  
Mac OS X version 10.3.9 or later  
Options  
Expression/volume pedal:  
Foot controller:  
Foot switch:  
XVP-10 EXP/VOL pedal  
EXP-2  
PS-1  
Damper pedal:  
Other:  
DS-1H  
MIDI cable  
* Appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice. (Feb./06)  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendices  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MIDI Implementation Chart  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendices  
Index  
Copying the settings of a  
combination (multi set) 72  
A
G
Alternate modulation 51  
Global mode 87  
Amp 55  
D
H
Amp EG 55  
AMS 51  
DAMPER jack 26  
Half-Damper 41  
Damper pedal 26, 41  
ARP ON/ OFF 91  
HI (Hyper Integrated) synthesis  
Demo song  
system  
Arpeggiator 91  
Adjusting the tempo 92  
Link 88  
Detune 67  
High pass filter 53  
Detuned sound 49  
On/ Off 91, 97  
Dialog 15  
I
Arpeggio pattern 93  
Initialization 99  
User arpeggio pattern 99  
Display 15, 119  
Contrast 115  
Insert effect 82, 84  
Install  
Double Program 48  
Mac OS X 31  
Windows XP 28  
ASSIGNABLE PEDAL 27, 89  
ASSIGNABLE SWITCH 26, 88  
Assigning a name 114  
Audio output 25  
Drum Kit 50, 107  
Bank 107  
Edit 108  
J
Effect send 110  
Joystick 40, 52, 55, 67, 85  
Drum sample 108  
AUDITION 38  
Drums Program 48  
Audition function 38  
K
Dual polyphonic  
Key Sync. 94  
arpeggiator 96, 104  
B
Dynamic modulation 85  
Bank Select 39, 63, 71  
BPM/ MIDI Sync. 86  
Bypass 86  
L
Layer 64  
E
LFO 50  
Edit Buffer 118  
Load 113  
Edit cell 15  
C
Local Control 32  
Low pass filter 53  
LPF CUTOFF 44  
Effect 79  
Category  
Combination 58  
Name 90  
Program 38  
EG-INTENSITY 44  
EG-RELEASE 44  
Envelope Generator 51  
Exclusive 33  
M
Chain 83  
Master effect 83  
Master EQ 83  
Master keyboard 33  
Memory Protect 88  
Check box 15  
ClickPoint 13  
Exclusive Group 109  
External control 111  
Combination 57  
Bank 58  
MIDI 14, 35, 75, 89  
Channel 39, 63  
Data dump 117  
Filter 64  
Category 58  
Select 57  
F
Filter 53  
Combination mode 57  
Keyboard Track 54  
Compare 47, 63, 74, 99, 108  
Program change 39, 58, 77  
Connection 25  
Computer 27  
Fixed Note Mode 103  
Foot pedal 27, 42  
MIDI channel that will control  
effects 85  
Control Track 70  
Foot switch 26, 39, 42  
MIDI/ Tempo Sync. 51  
Convert Position 33  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Mode 17  
Program 37  
Bank 38  
Category 38  
Select 37  
U
Combination mode 57  
Global mode 87  
Multi mode 69  
Program mode 37  
Select 19  
USB connector 32  
User arpeggio pattern 99  
Chord 102  
Drum 102  
Edit 100  
Melody 102  
Program mode 37  
Modulation  
Amp 55  
Filter 54  
Pitch 52  
R
REALTIME CONTROLS 43  
B-mode 115  
User Scale 89  
User All Note Scale 89  
User Octave Scales 89  
Rename 114  
Monophony 48  
Multi mode 69  
Multi Mode (Global) 33  
Multi set 69  
Utility 21  
Resonance 53  
RESONANCE/ HPF 44  
V
Restoring the factory  
settings 113  
Value 20  
Multisample 48  
Multi-timbre 33  
Mute 70  
Reverse 49  
VALUE controller 20  
Velocity 33, 40, 49, 55, 87  
Velocity Switch 64  
Vibrato 52  
Routing 81, 82, 84  
S
N
Save 21, 117  
Combination 61  
Drum kit 110  
Volume 42  
Timbre 61  
Track 71  
Note Number 40  
O
External control 112  
Multi set 75  
Program 45  
Volume balance 61  
OCTAVE 41, 88  
Oscillator 48  
Oscillator Mode 48, 107  
W
Wah 54  
User arpeggio 104  
Scroll bar 16  
Shuffle 95  
Write 21, 117  
Combination 61  
Drum kit 110  
External control 112  
Multi set 75  
Program 45  
P
Single Program 48  
Slope 65  
Page 15  
Select 19  
Split 64  
Page menu 16  
Status 63, 71  
Synchronization 105  
System exclusive 33  
Pan  
User arpeggio 104  
Drum Kit 110  
Program 56  
Timbre 60  
Track 71  
T
Parameter 15  
Select 20  
Tab 15, 20  
Tap tempo 115  
TEMPO 92  
Performance Edit 43  
Pitch 52  
Varying the pitch according to  
keyboard position 52  
Tempo Sync. 51  
Text dialog 114  
Three attributes of sound 46  
Tone Adjust 67  
Transpose 33, 67, 87  
Tremolo 55  
Pitch bend 52  
Pitch EG 52  
Polyphony 48  
Portamento 52, 66  
Power 23, 88  
Tuning 87  
Power On Mode 88  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS  
This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage  
requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product  
should be used. If you have purchased this product via the internet, through mail order,  
and/or via a telephone sale, you must verify that this product is intended to be used in  
the country in which you reside.  
WARNING: Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended  
could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer’s or distributor’s warranty.  
Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be  
disqualified from the manufacturer’s or distributor’s warranty.  
4015-2 Yanokuchi, Inagi-city, Tokyo 206-0812 Japan  
2006 KORG INC.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Indesit Dishwasher DE 43 User Manual
Infantino Baby Carrier 201 542 User Manual
Intel Computer Hardware S3200SH User Manual
Jackson Dishwasher Tempstar Series User Manual
JVC Camcorder GR AX838EG User Manual
JVC Flat Panel Television GM V42UB User Manual
JVC Security Camera TK C205UA User Manual
JVC Stereo Receiver KD AR400 User Manual
KitchenAid Trash Compactor 9871915A User Manual
Kodak DVD Player PDV 70X User Manual